BJJ University – Free Brazilian Jiu Jitsu Instructionals & Training Videos

REAR NAKED CHOKE John Danaher

1m · John Danaher

This video features John Danaher explaining the correct technique to apply a Rear Naked Choke from a back mount position. He demonstrates how to work the thumb knuckle under the opponent's jaw, progressively increasing the pressure and securing the position of the forearm and wrist. He emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's neck and using the chin to secure the position further. Finally, he demonstrates the correct elbow and arm positioning for optimally applying the choke.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The 3 Most Important Jiu Jitsu Techniques For A BJJ White Belt by John Danaher

30m · John Danaher

In this video, renowned instructor John Danaher explores the three most crucial Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) techniques a white belt should know, placing a particular emphasis on the elbow escape. He details how the elbow escape can effectively be used from the bottom position to escape from different kinds of pins. The move is labeled as the most important in all of BJJ, particularly beneficial for beginners as it underlines the concept of escaping from a poor position. Danaher further guides to the understanding of different pins and the correct means of using the elbow escape in various situations.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Escapes

Pin Escapes & Turtle Escapes: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$98.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional BJJ course by John Danaher that focuses on pin escapes and turtle escapes, which are important defensive maneuvers in BJJ. The series is part of the 'Go Further Faster' program aimed at speeding up the progress and effectiveness of a practitioner by identifying core positional skills required for first competence and ultimate excellence in the sport. The objective of the course is to teach foundational body movements, technical skills, concepts, tactics, and grand strategies upon which all progress in the sport of Jiu-Jitsu is made. Danaher emphasizes on 'Foundationalism', the idea that all skills of Jiu-Jitsu are supported by these foundational aspects.

Position: Submission Escape Category: Escapes

How To Do The Perfect Armbar by John Danaher

16m · John Danaher

John Danaher, highly respected BJJ coach and instructor, gives detailed guidance on how to perform the perfect armbar from the mount. Beginning with the basic positioning and factors necessary to engage the armbar, he lays out a precise approach to achieve the position, control the situation, and finally break the opponent's defense. He carefully explains the important concept of getting the opponent's elbow inside the line of your hips and provides strategies to achieve that against a resistant opponent. His method includes a precise hand-walking technique to make the armbar effective and able to be executed in various situations.

Technique: Armbar Position: Mount Category: Submissions

How To Do The Perfect BJJ Side Control Escape by John Danaher

15m · John Danaher

In this instructional video, John Danaher walks viewers through the process of how to perform a perfect side control escape. Explaining the principles behind a controlling pin, including the use of a pin as a set of wedges, he challenges the notion that success relies on body weight alone. Danaher emphasizes the importance of understanding how the opponent is holding you as this would directly influence the most effective method of escape. The video provides a comprehensive and detailed examination of effective side control escape techniques in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ).

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

Leglocks: Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video 'Leglocks: Enter The System' by John Danaher is an in-depth instructional program on mastering leg locks, which have been labelled as the "great equalizer" in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. John Danaher, one of the most sought after grappling instructors, guides the viewer through a curriculum-based approach to leg locks, detailing various positions and techniques. He emphasizes how leg locks can be successfully applied regardless of physical strength or flexibility, making it a game-changing skill to master. Much credit is given to his teachings for the success of UFC World Champions like Georges St Pierre and Chris Weidman, and ADCC competitor Garry Tonon.

Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Leg Locks

Best Takedowns For Jiu Jitsu (BJJ) by John Danaher

42m · John Danaher

In this video, BJJ coach John Danaher explains and demos several effective takedowns for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He discusses the differences between BJJ and other standing martial arts like judo and wrestling, emphasizing the importance of minimizing back exposure to prevent giving up points in BJJ matches. He also introduces some core selection criteria for BJJ takedowns that guide the techniques presented in his Feet to Floor series. The video provides a comprehensive resource for practitioners looking for effective and safe methods for taking opponents to the ground in a BJJ context.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

How To Do The Perfect Triangle Choke Even If You Have Short Legs by John Danaher

13m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher, an acclaimed Jiu-Jitsu coach, teaches how to perform a perfect triangle choke, even for those with short legs. He emphasizes that the success of the triangle choke does not merely depend on leg length but also heavily on proper body positioning. He provides a detailed breakdown on the correct body positioning and provides instruction on how to lock in the triangle for a tight choke. The video serves as an informative guide for all skill levels, with or without shorter legs.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Back Attacks Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, the most sought after BJJ Instructor worldwide, teaches his 'Enter The System' technique for back attacks. This teaching is based around a system used by world class athletes such as Gordon Ryan, George St. Pierre and more, and has been proven to be effective in EBI overtime history. The tutorial is easy to follow and broken down into a curriculum suitable for all levels. There is over 8.5 hours of content to learn from.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Back Control Category: Back Attacks

5 Tips To Pass ANY Guard by John Danaher

36m · John Danaher

John Danaher provides instructional content discussing five vital tips to improve and succeed in passing any guard within Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He begins with the emphasis on maintaining proper posture and base when stand up in an opponent's open guard. Danaher explains how to prevent the common guard player's technique of manipulating the opponent's head and hip positions to break their posture. The key takeaways include maintaining an upright chest (head higher than hips) and distributing weight evenly across the whole foot, not just the ball or heels. This way, practising these techniques can build a strong foundation for successful guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

BJJ Nogi Takedown by JOHN DANAHER

29s · John Danaher

In this video, renowned instructor John Danaher demonstrates a Nogi Takedown technique known as a Lateral Drop. He illustrates the transition from a possible forward throw to the lateral drop when the former isn't plausible. Instructor Danaher emphasizes the importance of stepping in on the training partner, keeping your chest open, and the right time to switch to the lateral drop. The short clip provides a clear idea of execution for this particular takedown.

Position: Standing — Leg Control Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Guard Retention: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is a part of the 'Go Further Faster' series by renowned BJJ instructor, John Danaher. Focusing on the fundamental aspect of Guard Retention, Danaher discusses one of the most important skills - retaining your guard against an opponent who intends to pass and pin you down. He aims to identify and explain the foundational skills, movements, and concepts needed to reach full potential in jiu-jitsu. The series focuses on three major positions where we must fight to retain the guard.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

How To Do The Perfect BJJ Mount Escape by John Danaher

26m · John Danaher

John Danaher demonstrates and details the mechanics of executing a successful elbow escape from the mount position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. After breaking down the anatomy of the mount and its impact on the overall dynamic, he delves into how to apply the elbow escape in this setting. The tutorial pays particular attention to the positioning of the practitioner's body and how to manipulate the opponent's body to achieve a successful escape. The video underscores the importance of understanding the concept of 'wedges' utilized in the mount position and how to effectively counter these.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

Are you training wrong? John Danaher explains the ideal way to drill for BJJ | Lex Fridma…

56s · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, BJJ coach John Danaher explains the true purpose of drilling in BJJ. He argues that the common practice of repetitive drilling for the sake of reaching certain numbers does not result in improvement. According to him, the focus should be on skill acquisition and understanding the underlying mechanics of a technique. He emphasizes the importance of gaining knowledge, but distinguishes this from actual skill, which is another layer of proficiency.

Category: Drills

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: A New Philosophy Of Positional Escapes by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features renowned instructor John Danaher teaching a new philosophy of positional escapes in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Insisting on the transformative potential of escapes, he demonstrates how to turn these defensive maneuvers into powerful attacks, creating a seamless blend of position and submission. Away from conventional wisdom, he instructs on leg and arm-based pins aimed at optimizing your escape strategy. Danaher, known for coaching champions like Gordon Ryan, Garry Tonon, and Georges St. Pierre, also shares insights into successful submission attacks, putting emphasis on leg locks, arm locks, and clamp guards.

Position: Various Category: Escapes

How To Do The Perfect Kimura From Side Control by John Danaher

10m · John Danaher

John Danaher presents a detailed breakdown of how to execute a Kimura submission from Side Control. He explores the importance of differentiating between the pushing and pulling hand, emphasizing the need for a 'pull dominant' Kimura over a 'push dominant' one. He also introduces the concept of the 'power line', which involves orienting oneself along a diagonal axis to the opponent, from opposite hip to shoulder. This alignment generates extreme tension in the opponent's arm, leading to a highly effective submission.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

HOW TO OPEN CLOSED GUARD - JOHN DANAHER

39s · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher teaches how to open closed guard in BJJ. He demonstrates the steps of coming up, putting one knee in the center and flexing the hamstring. The key details are to walk the left leg into alignment, posturing the knee right on the opponent's tailbone, and then inserting a knee post in the center to break the opponent's closed guard.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Passing the Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video presents an instructional lesson from BJJ expert and coach, John Danaher on his unique 5-step system for guard passing. It aims to simplify one of the most difficult tasks in BJJ, making it more efficient and precise. The teachings are a part of Danaher's unified system for dealing with the guard, focusing on the crucial steps and requirements for the guard passer. The system has proved successful for notable athletes like Gordon Ryan, Garry Tonon, and GSP.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Kimura tutorial - John Danaher #shorts #shortsvideo #shortsfeed

47s · John Danaher

This instructional video features John Danaher demonstrating a kimura submission from the closed guard position. Initially setting up what seems to be a triangle, he explains the importance of positioning, leg locking, and wrist exposure in order to effectively achieve the submission. By taking the opponent's elbow into the armpit and controlling the opponent's head, a bone-breaking submission can be achieved with only minimal movement. This variation of the kimura is one that Danaher strongly favors and recommends.

Technique: Kimura Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

Learn How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Mount Attack by John Danaher

23m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, renowned Brazilian Jiu Jitsu instructor John Danaher breaks down the technique for executing a perfect mount attack. He explains how his coaching philosophy focuses on bottom position for lower body attack and top position for upper body submissions. The video then dives into how the mount position works in the context of Jiu Jitsu as a sport. He elaborates on the importance of transitioning from getting the position to converting it into a submission, and illustrates this with examples from his students' competitions. The discussion also highlights the challenges faced in maintaining the mounted position against skilled opponents, and how tactics can be employed to overcome these obstacles.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

Kimura: Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, introduces his system for the Kimura submission in this instructional video. He advertises this system as an effective and versatile choice both for Gi and No Gi Jiu Jitsu, and even for self-defense purposes. As the teacher of champions including Garry Tonon, Georges St Pierre, and Chris Weidman, Danaher's methods are praised for their efficiency. The Kimura system is said to enhance one's overall understanding and performance in Jiu Jitsu.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

How to ESCAPE CLOSED GUARD

13s · John Danaher

This video features John Danaher teaching how to escape from a closed guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The technique involves bracing on the opponent's upper body and biceps, moving to a standing position, and using a reach back method to break open the opponent's closed guard. The video is part of a training series provided by BJJ Fanatics.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Escapes

How To Build The Perfect Half Guard Game by John Danaher

27m · John Danaher

In this instructional video, John Danaher shows how to effectively build a half guard game. He discusses the significance of the half guard position from both a defensive and offensive perspective, highlighting how athletes can either use it as their main sweeping technique or a primary passing position. The underlying aspect to keep in mind, according to Danaher, is the control or lack of control of the head and shoulders of the bottom player, which determines the success of the half guard game. He emphasized the importance of protecting the head and shoulders from the opponent to effectively utilize the half guard position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: No Gi Guard Passing by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an expert instructional from Professor John Danaher, who shares his proven techniques on No-Gi Guard Passing, focusing particularly on the Toreando footwork. The tutorial covers the central principles of passing from various guard forms including half guard, closed guard, supine guard, and seated guard. Danaher, as one of the most detailed and innovative coaches globally, provides insights into establishing control and stabilizing the position as part of the pass. The tutorial is aimed at giving its viewers a unified framework for passing, illustrated with the best ways to ensure dominance against the bottom player.

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How To Perform The Perfect Rear Naked Choke by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

This video features instructor John Danaher giving a thorough tutorial on how to successfully apply a Rear Naked Choke, from the back control position. He explains the anatomical targets of the choke and the difference between choking and strangulation in BJJ context. He also elaborates on common mistakes made while applying the choke, like putting pressure on the wrong spot, and demonstrates a more efficient way of performing the technique for a faster and more effective result. In addition, he mentions the importance of control in successfully applying this choke.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

What Are The Most Important Skills Needed For A BJJ Blue Belt by John Danaher

30m · John Danaher

This video featuring John Danaher provides insights on the necessary skills for a BJJ practitioner to achieve their blue belt. He emphasizes the importance of being able to escape from bad positions, especially when grappling a person with similar training experience. John Danaher also discusses the necessity of being effective in both top and bottom positions and having an effective offense, which includes being able to finish or submit an opponent. While he refrains from attributing the attainment of a blue belt to a strict set of specific moves, he underscores the importance of these mentioned capabilities.

Position: Other Category: Concepts/Strategy

Half Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the video, world-renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu coach, John Danaher, provides an in-depth tutorial on Half Guard techniques as part of his Go Further, Faster Fundamentals series. This comprehensive module focuses on the central principles and strategies around Half Guard, including off-balances, sweeps, and back takes. Throughout the over eight hours of content, Danaher shares his expertise to help viewers improve their guard retention skills in BJJ.

Technique: Back Take Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Build The Perfect BJJ Closed Guard Game by John Danaher

21m · John Danaher

This YouTube video features BJJ instructor John Danaher sharing his strategies on how to build the perfect closed guard game. He discusses the importance and advantage of closed guard in BJJ and how everyone, regardless of body type, can effectively play this position. He challenges the idea that closed guard is a neutral or defensive position, promoting it instead as an aggressive, attacking position. He also explains how small adjustments in a neutral position can confer a mechanical or tactical advantage, transforming it into a mildly dominant position.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

Rear Naked Strangle by JOHN DANAHER #shorts #shortsvideo

56s · John Danaher

This video tutorial demonstrates the Rear Naked Strangle technique, taught by instructor John Danaher. The instructor emphasizes the importance of connecting both to the opponent's lower body with legs and to the upper body with arms in order to successfully execute the move. Danaher provides step-by-step instructions including how to place the strangle arm, where to place hands, and how to finalize the strangle. It is an effective and popular submission technique in BJJ.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The Front Headlock System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features instruction from renowned coach John Danaher on his system for executing a front headlock. Highlighting its effectiveness in both Gi and No-Gi situations, and for self-defense, John explains the game-changing nature of this technique. The video also explains how the system has been used by UFC champs like Georges St Pierre and Chris Weidman, and grappling icons like Garry Tonon, Eddie Cummings, and Gordon Ryan. The front headlock system can revolutionize the BJJ game of any practitioner.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

Understanding Jiu Jitsu by John Danaher, Bernardo Faria & Gordon Ryan

25m · John Danaher

This video features John Danaher, one of the most well-known and well-respected Jiu Jitsu and Mixed Martial Arts coaches, as he is joined by 5x World Champion Bernardo Faria and ADCC Champ Gordon Ryan. The video focuses on explaining the core body mechanics of Jiu Jitsu and how it operates as a system. Danaher describes the varying situational steps involved in Jiu Jitsu, depending on the resistance presented by an opponent, and highlights the specialties of Mr. Ryan and Mr. Faria within this system. The video emphasizes the importance of understanding body movement and how this contributes to success within Jiu Jitsu, and emphasizes that physical strength is not a prerequisite for success within the sport.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Various Category: Concepts/Strategy

Double Underhook Throw By with John Danaher

36s · John Danaher

The video is about a jiu-jitsu technique called Double Underhook Throw-by by instructor John Danaher. He demonstrates how to properly perform the move from a standing position, emphasizing on control of the opponent's elbow and chin, positioning outside of the opponent's leg, and how to throw their hands straight to the floor to gain proper position. This results in taking down the opponent to the floor effectively. The video is detailed and instructional, making it a great learning tool for anyone interested in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing — Torso Control Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older and Less Athletic - Bottom game: Gi by John…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video, presented by the legendary BJJ coach, John Danaher, provides an insightful guide on ageless Jiu-Jitsu strategies. He teaches viewers how to outsmart athletic opponents, particularly when you are less athletic or older. Techniques covered include offensive guards, pin escapes, and strategic gameplans. The video also emphasizes the critical role of the Gi and showcases ways to submit opponents with a cross collar strangle.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Concepts/Strategy

How To Do Perfect Guard Retention In BJJ by John Danaher

20m · John Danaher

John Danaher discusses the topic of guard retention in this video, specifically focusing on the methods to maintain one's guard successfully against an opponent's guard passing attempts. He first critically analyzes and challenges the conventional move-for-move method, in which one identifies the opponent's guard pass strategy then counters it with a specific response. Danaher then introduces a conceptual method where he suggests applying broad concepts and principles that can be effective against different types of guard passes, which reduces the necessity of identifying the specific pass your opponent is employing. He suggests that there are six fundamental requirements that an opponent must satisfy to pass the guard, and the player must focus on preventing these.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

ROLLING TRIANGLE from the CLAMP John Danaher

45s · John Danaher

John Danaher demonstrates how to execute a rolling triangle from the clamp position. He begins by demonstrating how to get the inside position and transition into the clamp position, using your foot to disrupt your opponent's posture. As the opponent's head lowers, one should raise their own head and proceed to rotate and point the knees towards the ground. As the instructor kicks through, a superb attacking position is achieved, which enables the execution of the rolling triangle.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Clamp Category: Submissions

Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older and Less Athletic - Bottom game: Gi by John…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, legendary BJJ instructor, John Danaher, presents his methodology for winning when one is older or less athletic, with a focus on the bottom game. He instructs on how to utilize offensive guards and pin escapes effectively. Techniques include action from a variety of positions and scenarios, particularly ashi garami, x-guard, double elevator guard, and different open and closed guard scenarios. Danaher's teachings emphasize intelligence, isometric strength, utilization of the Gi, and tactics for slowing down athletic opponents enabling one to secure high reward attacks.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Guard Retention

WRIST CONTROL TO TRIANGLES - JOHN DANAHER

1m · John Danaher

In the video, instructor John Danaher explains the step-by-step process of executing the Wrist Control to Triangles submission from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He demonstrates how to control the opponent's wrist and efficiently transition to a triangle choke. He emphasizes the importance of the collar tie and how to wedge around your opponent's head and shoulders to lock in the figure four, creating an incapacitating strangulation.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

How To Perfect Your Guard Passing No Gi by John Danaher

21m · John Danaher

In this video, BJJ instructor John Danaher shares his knowledge on guard passing in a no-gi context. Danaher, known for his students' excellent leg locking skills, emphasizes the importance of mastering guard passing to be able to attack effectively. He explains that there are four main scenarios that require specific guard passing strategies and starts by focusing on dealing with a closed guard. He stresses that diversification in attacking is CRUCIAL in BJJ, reinforcing that only attacking the legs or upper body limits a practitioner's ability to be successful in submissions.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: Mounted Pin Attacks - The 4x4 Mount System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video, presented by world-class coach John Danaher, is focused on mastering the 4x4 mount system from the mounted pin position. Danaher guides viewers through the best submission holds to apply from mount, such as the arm triangle and mounted triangle. Viewers are also taught effective methods for gripping, hand fighting, and controlling the grappling exchanges. Moreover, Danaher shares strategies on dealing with potential problems that could arise during the execution of the 4x4 system.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

The High Elbow Guillotine by John Danaher

12m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher explains the intricacies of a High Elbow Guillotine starting from a Front Headlock position. He outlines the main problems that students encounter when attempting this move, including issues of shoulder and elbow placement. He emphasizes the importance of keeping the head forward, pushing the strangle-side shoulder forward while keeping the elbow back to maintain space and avoid countermeasures by the opponent. He then demonstrates the technique step by step, highlighting the importance of placing the support hand between the opponent's shoulder and neck.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

Perfect Attack From Side Control - John Danaher

15m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher provides an instructional guide on how to perfect an attack from the side control position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Danaher dispels the common belief that side control's biggest appeal is stability and an expanded range of submission techniques. Instead, he argues that the real appeal of side control should not be its stability or increased submission options, but its potential as a means to submission. He warns against an overly defensive mindset, where the primary aim becomes immobilizing your opponent, leading to a lack of offensive technique and submission.

Position: Side Control Category: Positional Control

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: Side Attacks - Building a Devastating Side Control System by John Dan…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide by John Danaher on mastering Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) skill in controlling, submitting, and dominating opponents from the side control position. In this comprehensive course, he covers the best submission holds to apply from side position, including but not limited to kimuras, sankaku, and juji gatame. Danaher provides a 4-step method to win from side control and how to shut down opponent's escape routes from side control. Further, he shares insightful strategies to troubleshoot potential issues within the 4-step system.

Position: Side Control Category: Positional Control

Wrist Controls To Triangles by John Danaher

4m · John Danaher

In the video, John Danaher, one of the most well-known Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructors discusses and demonstrates how to execute a triangle choke from a guard position using wrist controls. He first criticizes the traditional method of executing a triangle choke using double wrist controls due to its lack of posture control. Instead, he advocates for using a single wrist control combined with a collar tie to maintain control over the opponent's posture. Danaher gives a detailed walkthrough of the technique, explaining how to get the necessary grips, when to split the legs, and how to finish the submission.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

3 Most Important Jiu Jitsu Strangles (Chokes) by John Danaher

34m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher covers the three most important strangles or choke holds in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He starts by explaining the difference between a choke, which is an attack on the airway, and a strangle, which is an attack on the blood supply to the brain. He emphasizes that strangling techniques are more effective as they can render a person unconscious in seconds. The video promises to provide detailed instruction on how to execute these strangles safely and effectively.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

Closed Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features instructor John Danaher teaching techniques on how to exploit vulnerabilities from the Closed Guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He presents six main vulnerabilities to target, breaks down the mechanics behind each attack, and explains the strategic significance of these tactics. Aside from focusing on attacking, Danaher also emphasizes how to counter moves from the opponents. Various technical methods to achieve top locks, clamp guards, and side scissors are demonstrated throughout the video.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

Go Further Faster: BJJ Fundamentals (Gi) by John Danaher

10m · John Danaher

The video features John Danaher explaining the basics of BJJ fundamentals. He presents Jiu Jitsu as being composed of 15 fundamental positioning skills divided into three areas: standing position, ground position bottom, and ground position top. Each of these positions has five fundamental skills within it. Danaher and Bernardo Faria discuss the importance of these fundamentals in greater detail in the second part of the video. The focus is on how foundational skills in BJJ are central to advanced techniques and eventual success in the discipline.

Position: Various Category: Concepts/Strategy

John Danaher Leg Lock Instructional

3m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher conducts a seminar on applying powerful attack series from cross ashi garami and inside sankaku positions. He explains the significance of controlling both the primary and secondary legs of the opponent and introducing a dilemma by threatening to break the secondary leg. He demonstrates the proper application of an Achilles Lock for the secondary leg and transitioning to inside sankaku for a heel hook finish on the primary leg. All these are accomplished with a focus on limiting opponent's defense and escape options and maintaining control and breaking pressures.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Leg Locks

The Fastest Way: To Increase Your Submission Percentage (No Gi) by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features John Danaher, a legendary coach and instructor, teaching high-percentage techniques, back takes, and powerful submission strategies to increase your submission percentage in BJJ No Gi. The focus of the video is on the rear strangle, a king of submissions, and its variations. It also includes development of a diverse armdrag system from open guard that forces opponents to expose their back for high-percentage back takes. The video shows how to take the back from various positions like standing, half guard, open guard, closed guard, mount, side mount, and even from inferior positions.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The Perfect Way To Understand The No Gi (Grappling) Open Guard by John Danaher

32m · John Danaher

Summary: John Danaher provides an in-depth look at understanding the No Gi open guard. He discusses the distinctive style of his students who pressure their opponents from the bottom guard position through the threat of submission, making opponents reluctant to engage. He believes that strategy is important as technique when playing guard to induce specific reactions from opponents. He also emphasizes the importance of high percentage techniques from the guard position and their relationship to the strategies employed.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

This is Why Danaher's Students Control EVERYONE in No-Gi

15m · John Danaher

In the video, premier Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructor John Danaher introduces the Shoulder Crunch System, a No-Gi control system he developed. He explains how this system allows a practitioner to maintain control over the opponent's posture from the guard position, countering the common issue of loss of control experienced when transitioning from Gi to No-Gi combat. The system revolves around a particular variation of Sumi Gaeshi, a sweeping technique John's students, including Gordon Ryan, have successfully used in high-level competition. He demonstrates key concepts like the "Locked Hands" principle, exploring how to manage opponent's reactions and leverage them into sweeps, upper body submissions, and leg lock entries.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Open Guard Category: Transitions

Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older or Less Athletic - Bottom Game by John Danah…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features renowned coach John Danaher teaching strategies and techniques particularly useful for older or less athletic practitioners of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He emphasizes understanding key positions like half guard, mount, and rear mount, and explains how to utilize these positions for sweeping offense and submission finishing. Techniques covered include the tightwaist series, deep half, knee levers, ude gatame, front chokes, and more, all optimized for the older and less agile grappler. The video, aimed at improving performance without reliance on speed or flexibility, is part of a broader series taught by Danaher at Team New Wave.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Concepts/Strategy

How To Build The Perfect Half Guard Game For No Gi by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

The video features John Danaher giving an in depth explanation on how to use half guard effectively particularly in No-Gi. He highlights the main differences between Gi and No-Gi and how grip plays a crucial role, providing advice on how to adjust strategies for bottom half guard. He contends a well-executed half guard is advantageous for both the top and the bottom positions, underpinning this strategy with an understanding of the relationship between the opponent's outside shoulder and hip. He further explains the importance of keeping the shoulder off the mat and making good use of the underhook.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

DON'T try the soulder crunch unless you avoid this mistake (John Danaher) #bjjlesson #bjj

1m · John Danaher

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, explains an often misunderstood aspect of the Shoulder Crunch technique. He emphasizes that this movement is not about levering your opponent's head with your elbow, as many might think. Instead, he explains the importance of keeping the left elbow higher than the opponent's shoulder to prevent an easy escape. Lastly, he mentions how this technique's real strength comes from the feet and legs, with the goal being to sweep your opponent using your lower body strength, rather than attempting to overpower them with your elbow.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Sweeps

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: No Gi Half Guard 3 Directions of Attack by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a comprehensive instruction on the no-gi half guard and its three directions of attack taught by renowned BJJ instructor, John Danaher. He delves into the concept and strategy of this favored position, demonstrating how to maintain half guard against heavy pressure and how to transition back to offense. Techniques like tight waists, single legs, body locks, knee shields, deep half, scorpions and knee levers are merged into a system for mastering the half guard. The video is part of an 8-volume series.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Half Guard Passing by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

The YouTube video features renowned BJJ instructor John Danaher teaching the art of perfect Jiu Jitsu half guard passing. Danaher starts by explaining the difference between conventional guard passing and half guard passing, highlighting that the half guard strategy is a drastically different approach to bypassing the opponent's guard. In this approach, he emphasises upon the control of the opponent's head, which contrasts with the common focus on controlling the hips in traditional guard passing. He introduces a key movement called the 'cranial shift', which involves switching the focus from the opponent's hips to their head. The video is essentially a tutorial on this half guard passing technique.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Complete Skills For The Jiu Jitsu Standing Game by John Danaher

35m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher gives an overview of the complete skills that a Jiu Jitsu fighter should have when fighting standing. He points out two main weaknesses -leg locks and standing game- historically prevalent in Jiu Jitsu and then focuses on the standing game. He believes having a strong standing game comprises more than learning random takedowns and should be a complete part of the game. The video further breaks down the skills necessary such as gripping strategies, stances, and different forms of takedowns (front and back).

Technique: Back Take Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Triangles Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, John Danaher – a well-known and highly sought-after grappling coach – offers comprehensive coverage on mastering triangle submissions. He refers to the Triangle as the most versatile submission technique in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He demonstrates various setups, chokes, and armlocks that could be deployed from either the top or bottom positions. The course aims to transform your overall game by integrating this skill into your moves.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

The New Philosophy Of Jiu Jitsu Positional Escapes (The New Wave Jiu Jitsu) by John Danah…

34m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, explains a new approach to the philosophy of Jiu Jitsu positional escapes. The new method strays from the conservative nature of traditional BJJ and incorporates a system of re-attack or counterattack after a successful escape. Danaher introduces some advanced form of escapes and explains the squad's unique escape philosophy. This video highlights the merging of traditional escape methods into newer practices that involve a more aggressive approach rather than merely returning to a neutral position.

Position: Various Category: Escapes

Understanding The Open Guard In BJJ by John Danaher

24m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher provides an in-depth understanding of the open guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He discusses the importance and uniqueness of this position in the sport of Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes open guard as one of the most crucial positional skills in Jiu-Jitsu, as it largely shapes an athlete's overall development in the sport. He also introduces various principles related to open guard, stressing on the concept of double directionality and coupled force for a more efficient application of techniques.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

Go Further Faster Bundle by John Danaher

$1297.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an advertisement for an 8-volume bundle by renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructor, John Danaher, titled Go Further, Faster. This wraparound series emphasizes learning basic Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu tactics, methods for preserving one's guard, and escaping from precarious positions. Students are educated about using strategies effectively when grappling within half guard, closed guard, and open guard. This content aims to deepen learners' understanding of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu and accelerates their progress in the martial art.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The Importance Of BJJ Fundamentals by John Danaher

37m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, instructor John Danaher emphasizes on the importance and role of fundamentals in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). This instructional video features a discussion on how fundamental skills serve as the foundation on which advanced skills are built, with the lack of fundamental skills potentially causing struggle despite proficiency in niche areas. The video explains that being strong in the fundamentals enables quicker progress and makes it easier to acquire new techniques. It emphasises that fundamentals should never be seen as a phase to move past but rather, they should be continuously improved and relied upon.

Category: Concepts/Strategy

Opening Closed Guard Knee Post Method by John Danaher

7m · John Danaher

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, explains the method of opening a closed guard using the knee post technique in this instructional video. He describes the importance of posturing, positioning the knee between the opponent's buttocks, focusing pressure on the tailbone to gain control, and eventually break open the guard. He additionally provides advice on handling any potential issues, like the opponent's ability to pull with their legs or manipulations with the arms, and stresses upon the importance of maintaining control throughout. This video is beneficial for advanced control techniques in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu guard passing.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Standing2Ground: Takedowns & Standing Skills For Jiu Jitsu by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This is an instructional video that is lead by John Danaher, world-renowned BJJ instructor. He demonstrates various takedown techniques with explanations on how to use these methods for different situations during a grappling game. The emphasis is put on the transition from the standing position to the ground through techniques such as snap downs, hand fighting, and lower body offense. He also covers how the principles and concept of grappling takedowns adjust based on different rulesets.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Back Bend Takedown by John Danaher

15s · John Danaher

John Danaher in the video executes the 'Back Bend' takedown technique. It commences from a standing position where his opponent locks with him. As his opponent resists, Danaher ensures that the opponent's shoulders are positioned behind his hips and steps forward. He then swiftly executes the 'Back Bend' takedown by simply dropping down.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

ARM BAR FROM GUARD - JOHN DANAHER

43s · John Danaher

In this video, instructor John Danaher details how to properly perform an armbar from guard position. He emphasizes the importance of bringing the opponent's arm to the center line, controlling their head, and obtaining what he calls a "top lock". Once the top lock is obtained, the goal is to pivot to an angle, bringing the leg over the opponent's head, and applying pressure. Finally, he instructs viewers on the option of finishing the submission from the bottom or switching to a top position.

Technique: Armbar Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Open Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video titled "Open Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster" features legendary BJJ coach John Danaher teaching the fundamentals of Open Guard. The focus is on maximizing leverage, understanding the concept of kuzushi (imbalance) for all attacks, and the importance of gripping secrets. Also, effective sweeps are discussed to further enhance the power of the Open Guard. The aim is to enable viewers to systematically understand and approach the Open Guard based on Professor Danaher's insights and studies.

Technique: Grip-Based Sweep Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

John Danaher Explains Closed Guard Fundamentals

18m · John Danaher

In this instructional video, John Danaher delves into the fundamentals of the closed guard. Despite it being less frequently used in competitions, Danaher places importance on practicing this position in gym training sessions. He discusses the advantage of distance control provided by the closed guard, a crucial aspect not often present in open guard. Danaher also touches on how to adapt a closed guard for no-gi games, and how to use it effectively while minimizing vulnerability to leg-lock attacks.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Takedowns by John Danaher

27m · John Danaher

John Danaher, the famed BJJ instructor, explains the importance of takedowns in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He particularly focuses on the use of both hands and feet, calling the use of hands "tewaza" or hand takedowns, explaining their utility due to their natural dexterity. The video also introduces "ashiwaza" or foot takedowns, which are broken down into "small foot techniques" and "big foot techniques". The former refers to techniques where one's foot targets the opponent's foot, the latter involves leg-to-leg hooks.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Arm Bars: Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional course by John Danaher on mastering arm bars in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The course, divided into 8 parts, delves into the intricacies of an arm bar and provides key insights on how to transform simple moves into powerful techniques. John's 'jujigatame system' espouses a two-step method to effectively execute an arm bar. He further details how, with a series of precisely detailed adjustments, any athlete can significantly increase their armbar success rate.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

Entries Into Rear Triangle Back Position by John Danaher

4m · John Danaher

In this video, instructor John Danaher demonstrates technique of entries into Rear Triangle Back Position, a favored position among his students. He begins by setting up the technique from a turtle position, uses a tight waist control to break his opponent down to the hip, and secures his arm. He then postures into the Rear Triangle Back Position, locks a trap triangle and transitions to figure-four for a strangle finish. This is a practical example of attacking a turtle position with Rear Triangle Back Position.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

2 on 1 Grip Scissor Sweep by John Danaher

3m · John Danaher

In this video, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu coach, John Danaher, demonstrates the 2 on 1 Grip Scissor Sweep from a closed guard position. This scissor sweep variation involves getting a strong two-on-one grip on your opponent. The key is to control one of your opponent's arms using a cross collar grip and a grip on the tricep, which helps to off-balance the opponent and allows the sweep to occur more efficiently. This technique also includes details on how to adjust for an opponent who is trying to distance themselves during the sweep setup.

Technique: Scissor Sweep Position: Closed Guard Category: Sweeps

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: Closed Guard - Building a Complete Closed Guard System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This course offers a comprehensive strategy for effective closed guard retention taught by John Danaher. The instructor delves deep into closed guard techniques such as the side scissor, the clamp, double underhooks, and the top lock. There's emphasis on attacking legs against opponents who stand within the guard, and employing leg locking strategies. Another key concept taught is a two-stage method to controlling the fight for shorter grapplers.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

Danaher - What's wrong with BJJ Takedowns?

19m · John Danaher

In this video, superstar coach John Danaher discusses the issues he sees in the current Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu standing game. He identifies three problems, with the first being a lack of motivation to learn takedowns since they are not deemed necessary for a successful Jiu-Jitsu career. The second issue he notes is a coaching problem where takedowns are taught as an isolated skill rather than an integrated part of the BJJ system, leading to a fragmented understanding of the standing game. Danaher uses his teaching methodology to challenge these issues and improve the understanding and application of takedowns in BJJ.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

John Danaher on one of the most important moves in BJJ #bjj #johndanaher #kingsway

1m · John Danaher

This video is a short tutorial on the armbar technique, presented by John Danaher. He emphasizes the effectiveness of the move, stating that there's no other move that can change the tide of a match so quickly, with less effort and risk. However, it's essential to execute the armbar properly to make it a significant threat to the opponent. Considering this, he argues the armbar is one of the most important moves in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Armbar Category: Transitions

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: A New Philosophy Of Submissions Escapes by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher's "New Wave Jiu Jitsu: A New Philosophy Of Submissions Escapes" provides a comprehensive guide on escaping submission holds, encompassing a wide range of positions like guillotines, armbars, triangles, kumaras, and heel hooks. The 8-volume mega series is designed to raise defensive prowess by enhancing users' understanding of finishing submission holds so they can effectively prevent and escape them. Apart from offering key insights into each position, the video trains viewers to best leverage failed submission attempts for launching immediate counter attacks. The techniques taught are the ones used by champion athletes coached by Danaher himself, including Gordon Ryan, Garry Tonon, Craig Jones, and Georges St. Pierre.

Position: Submission Category: Escapes

HOW TO ESCAPE RUBBER GUARD - GORDON RYAN

1m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan teaches how to escape from the rubber guard position in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. Initially, the aim is to post both hands on the ground and move the right shoulder forward. However, if the opponent's elbow dominates the inside space and prevents this, one should pace both hands on the floor, lean head over head, and stand. Then, turn the thumbs down and shake until the head and arm come free.

Position: Open Guard Category: Escapes

KNEE ELBOW ESCAPE by Gordon Ryan

1m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a well-known BJJ instructor, demonstrates the 'Knee Elbow Escape' technique in this instructional video. The technique begins with the practitioner on the bottom of the guard, bridging and straightening their leg to expose the top player's foot. The bottom player traps the exposed foot between their two legs and uses a series of leg movements to wedge the top player's knee. The sequence culminates with the practitioner escaping to a half guard position.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking The Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video presents Gordon Ryan's 3-part, systematic approach to guard passing. Ryan, an ADCC World Champion and IBJJF No Gi Double Gold Black Belt World Champion, teaches his method which works regardless of size or skill level. In over 10 hours of detailed instruction and analysis of live sparring footage, he demonstrates how he dissects and bypasses the guard of highly skilled opponents. Emphasizing knowledge as the key to winning, Ryan shares insights from his intense, focused study of passing.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

HOW TO GET CHEST TO CHEST #1 Gordon Ryan

27s · Gordon Ryan

The video features BJJ superstar, Gordon Ryan explaining a guard passing method to get chest to chest contact with the opponent. He emphasizes the importance of working around the opponent's frames, using a cross shoulder post. He also describes a 'pull-push' game, which includes a hip switch and an over back grip to gain control over the opponent's head and shoulders. Once control is gained, Gordon demonstrates how to easily start getting "chest to chest" and pass the guard, even if the opponent attempts to push away.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Other Category: Guard Passing

INSIDE ELBOW ESCAPE From BOTTOM MOUNT by Gordon Ryan

18s · Gordon Ryan

The video features instructor Gordon Ryan teaching the Inside Elbow Escape from a Bottom Mount position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Ryan demonstrates escaping when the opponent has their hands on the floor and feet close together, no crossface applied. He emphasizes securing the inside position before initiating a bridge to successfully escape, putting yourself in a better position to counterattack.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

They Shall Not Pass by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Gordon Ryan, the ADCC Absolute Champion, presenting his guard retention system that can be employed in various positions including X guard, half guard, and seated guard. Gordon shows detailed techniques on how to prevent common passes such as knee cuts, torreando, and stacking. The 8-volume series not only showcases the techniques but also includes footage of Gordon performing these techniques live at the gym while narrating the process, giving a comprehensive understanding of the system.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

One of my favorite ways to get to a triangle. #bjj #jiujitsu #gordonryan #jonjones

1m · Gordon Ryan

In this YouTube video, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) competitor Gordon Ryan presents an instructional video on how to set up a triangle choke from the guard position. He demonstrates this technique by taking control of his opponent's wrist and shoulder, which forces the opponent to move in a specific direction. Ryan then uses this movement to take his knee inside of his partner's shoulder and throw his foot over to establish the triangle choke. He emphasizes on the importance of controlling the angle and the opponent's leg to secure the submission.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

Guard Retention - How To Never Get Your Guard Passed In Jiu Jitsu by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video renowned Brazilian Jiu Jitsu athlete, Gordon Ryan, demonstrates how to retain guard. He emphasizes the importance of not allowing your opponent to pass your guard, particularly past your hips which he refers to as the "J point". Ryan demonstrates various grips and transitions to keep the opponent in front and avoid guard pass, stressing the concept of "stickiness" and constant off-balancing. He also outlines strategies for preventing the opponent from taking control of the head and keeping control of the inside position.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The Pillars of Defense: Pin Escapes - Defensive to Offensive Cycles by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is part of a 9-part series by Gordon Ryan focused on pin escapes from multiple positions like mount, side control and knee-on-belly. Gordon aims to provide strategies, tips and techniques on how to transform defensive situations into offensive opportunities by capitalizing on opponents' pins. Emphasis is laid on improving the effectiveness of kipping escapes, side guards, and tricep post escapes. The video also includes rolling footage from gym sessions featuring Gordon Ryan applying the techniques and detailed breakdowns of his actions for better understanding.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

Great Kimura Sequence from Butterfly Guard by Gordon Ryan

1m · Gordon Ryan

The video features instructor Gordon Ryan explaining a Kimura sequence from the butterfly guard position. He shows how to let the opponent cross-face, then reach around and lock hands for the Kimura. He explains options they have based on the opponent's reaction, such as getting their hand behind their back or using it for positional gains. He mentions the possibility of transitioning to other attacks like armbar, triangle, or taking the back.

Technique: Kimura Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Submissions

Great Options From Mount Position by Gordon Ryan

59s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, instructor Gordon Ryan explains a strategy for maintaining positional control from the mount position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He demonstrates how to pin down the opponent's hand and describes using a "dilemma" strategy, where the opponent has to choose between two unfavorable options. If the opponent does not react to the hand pin, Ryan advises to lift their arm above their head. However, if the opponent attempts to remove the pin, it opens them up to several other submissions or back exposure. Ryan emphasizes the importance of creating these sort of dilemmas to control the fight and stay a step ahead of your opponent.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

Systematically Attacking From Open Guard Seated Position by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Gordon Ryan shares advanced techniques from his seated open guard. Techniques covered include the shoulder crunch sumi gaeshi, double kouchi gari, and ashi garami entries. He imparts knowledge on how to systematically control and attack any reaction from this position, having honed these techniques with his professor, John Danaher. The video includes live sparring footage where Gordon applies these techniques, followed by a breakdown of the footage for better understanding.

Position: Seated Guard Category: Guard Retention

What Every BJJ White Belt And Blue Belt Should Learn And Focus In Jiu Jitsu by Gordon Ryan

6m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan emphasizes the importance of learning to escape and defend bad positions before moving on to attacking techniques in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Gordon Ryan advises that white to blue belts should focus on their pin escapes and submission escapes which will instill the confidence to open up and attempt submissions and attacks. From purple belt onwards the focus can then shift towards attacking techniques as by that point the practitioner should have a solid defensive foundation. He suggests this structure based on his own experiences and training.

Position: Various Category: Concepts/Strategy

The Best Way To Escape From The Jiu Jitsu Body Triangle by Gordon Ryan

9m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches how to efficiently escape the "Body Triangle" position, a commonly used back control technique in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. Ryan explains and demonstrates that one key to escaping this position is having confidence in your primary defensive hand's ability to prevent the opponent from strangling you. Simultaneously, the secondary hand aids in unlocking the opponent's triangle lock and escaping. The method revolves around the idea of trapping the opponent's leg between your legs, and creating ankle exposure through strategic hip rotating and hand-assisting methods. This technique, he argues, is the most effective way of escaping the body triangle.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking From Top Pins: Mount by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Gordon Ryan instructing viewers on his 8-volume mount control system. This system is designed to teach you how to maintain the mount position effectively, shut down opponent's potential escapes, and isolate limbs for submissions. Techniques used by Ryan in live sparring are broken down and explained in detail. This system is the same one that Ryan has utilized to dominate at elite levels of no-gi grappling, incorporating his coach John Danaher's revolutionary concepts and dilemmas.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

ARM DRAG TO BACK TAKE - GORDON RYAN

1m · Gordon Ryan

This YouTube video features BJJ black belt Gordon Ryan demonstrating the "Arm Drag to Back Take" technique. After obtaining a high armpit grip on the partner's arm, Gordon elevates his elbow and pushes his partner's arm underneath it. Then, he simultaneously pulls across the hands and over the right shoulder to position his partner's arm across the center line, achieving a tight grip. Subsequently, with a pendulum action of his left leg, he tucks in the right elbow while hanging off his partner's body, gaining control over his partner's posture and successfully taking their back. He emphasizes the importance of maintaining a high grip on the armpit for better control and grip retention.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

How To Perfectly Escape From Mount, Side Control and North South No Gi by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan demonstrates how to escape from mount, side control, and north-south positions effectively in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, emphasizing the concept of "pin escapes". Ryan builds on the idea of cranium control and the necessity of controlling the opponent's head and shoulders to maintain a pin. The primary strategy revolves around establishing an inside position, where the practitioner fights to bring their limbs to the inside while simultaneously separating the opponent's control from their head and shoulders. Furthermore, he explores adjustments for north-south position due to its unique nature where the opponent does not control the practitioner's head and shoulders. Ryan finishes by highlighting the transition from a defensive cycle to an offensive one after successfully escaping.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking From Half Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a comprehensive guide on how to control and attack from the Half Guard position by Gordon Ryan, an ADCC Absolute Champion. Ryan delves into his preferred Half Guard configurations such as knee shields, half butterfly, and deep half, and explains the techniques, strategies and combinations that he has perfected for no-gi grappling. Moreover, he shows how to effectively pummel and grip in a no-gi context using underhooks, cross shoulder posts and more. The video also includes live rolling footage, broken down in real-time by Ryan, which gives a hands-on demonstration of the system in action.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Gordon Ryan on how women can beat men in BJJ #jiujitsu

1m · Gordon Ryan

In this YouTube video, the world-renowned No-Gi BJJ practitioner, Gordon Ryan, offers his advice on how women can compete against men in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Gordon emphasizes that the key is to focus on lower body submissions such as leg entanglements, as this prevents men from leveraging their upper body strength. He further explains that these techniques not only keep the opponent’s weight off but also limit their hand usage, thus allowing females to use both their arms and legs against the opponent's legs.

Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Submissions

BJJ Techniques: Arm Drag to Back Take by Gordon Ryan

5m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a renowned BJJ grappler, presents an instructional video on the technique of transitioning from a Closed Guard position to a Back Take using an Arm Drag. Highlighting the importance of gripping, he demonstrates multiple scenarios where an arm drag could be employed and elaborates the process of performing it. Ryan emphasizes the need for an excellent grip, precise movements, and maintaining offensive control from the very beginning to ensure success. He discusses the significance of putting weight on the partner's arm and turning the chest downwards to maintain control and thwart the opponent's attempts to regain posture.

Technique: Back Take Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

Systematically Attacking The Legs by Gordon Ryan

$174.50 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a masterclass by Gordon Ryan, focusing on attacking the lower body and various leg entanglement positions such as Irimi Ashi Garami, Cross Ashi, 50/50, and Outside Ashi. Ryan goes through step-by-step how to successfully apply these techniques, and defend against them while maintaining safety. Key submission techniques taught are inside and outside heel hooks. The instruction includes rolling footage where Ryan demonstrates these techniques in action.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Leg Locks

Best Way To Control The Mount In Jiu Jitsu by Gordon Ryan

8m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches a unique technique to maintain control in the top mount position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The method involves using a deliberate and systematic approach to isolating the opponent's limbs using cross grip techniques, as opposed to the common straight wrist grips. This isolates the weaker rotator cuff muscles of the opponent instead of their stronger chest muscles. Ryan also discusses creating a series of dilemmas for the opponent by manipulating their limbs. He suggests that this method of control is useful, especially in no-gi matches.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

The Best No Gi Guard Passing System On The Planet by Gordon Ryan

12m · Gordon Ryan

The video is a 12-minute tutorial from BJJ instructor Gordon Ryan, teaching his Passing Guard System 2.0 in a No Gi context. He explains the importance of getting past the opponent's hip line, known as the "J-point", and camping there. He demonstrates a series of techniques like Toriyando passing, high-step passing, and preventing the opponent's guard recovery through effective head placement and maintaining pressure. He also outlines how to smoothly transition into other later positions, such as half guard, based on the opponent's reactions. The tutorial stresses the role of adaptability and energy conservation during guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

Systematically attacking From Top Pins: Side Control & North South by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Gordon Ryan provides detailed instruction on how to effectively execute submissions such as Kimuras, triangles, and armbars from Side Control & North South positions. He explains the concept of isolating and submitting limbs and how to stop escape attempts, thereby ensuring constant control. The system he demonstrates is the one he uses in no-gi grappling, with guidance from his coach, John Danaher. He also breaks down live footage to clearly illustrate the application of the techniques in real-time combat scenarios.

Technique: Armbar Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

ADRESSING a HIGH MOUNT by Gordon Ryan

24s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan explains and demonstrates strategies and movements to address and escape a high mount in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Focused on survival and defense, he emphasizes the inability to simply bridge or bring elbows down while the opponent extends your arms overhead. Instead, he suggests playing a waiting game for the opponent to switch to "juji", after which he instructs viewers through a sequence of steps involving raising legs and bringing knees inside to escape and regain control.

Position: Mount Category: Survival/Defense

One of my favorite details for the darce #bjj #jiujitsu #gordonryan #jonjones

1m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a well-known BJJ athlete, explains his preferred technique for applying the Darce choke. He emphasizes the importance of using one's ear to restrict the opponent's movement by pressing it onto their rear deltoid. This allows him to set his hands without having to rush, leading to a more secure choke. The effectiveness of the choke also relies on the proximity of the hand positioning to the opponent's shoulder blades.

Position: Darce Choke Category: Submissions

Systematically Attacking the Guard Body Lock Study by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, renowned grappler Gordon Ryan shares his comprehensive body lock system for successful guard passing. He delves into a range of techniques, such as front and side body locks, tight-waists, over-under body locks, high tripods and others, illustrating how to effectively break through the opponent's guard. He also introduces his "Golden Trilemma", a principle designed to create unstoppable passing threats. Additionally, Ryan offers breakdowns of his actual gym footage to demonstrate these techniques in action.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan’s secret for white and blue belts in Jiu Jitsu #bjj #gordonryan #jiujitsu

46s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, renowned BJJ instructor Gordon Ryan imparts advice targeted at white and blue belt practitioners. He emphasizes on the importance of having clear short-term and long-term goals in order to make substantive progress in the sport. He stresses that actively thinking about the sport, even when off the mat, and having a vision of what they want to accomplish can drastically increase the rate of their progression. He also notes that time is the main factor in improving in jiu-jitsu, and faster progression can be achieved through consistent goal setting and focus.

Position: Other Category: Concepts/Strategy

How to Never Lose the Mount Position by Gordon Ryan

54s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan instructs on how to maintain control while in the mount position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes the importance of having effective default grips to counter the opponent's attempts to dislodge or escape from the mount. Ryan demonstrates how to pin an opponent's hand to the mat when they bridge or push against the chest. He further explains how to isolate their arm when they attempt to escape or off-balance the mount position.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

Systematically Attacking The Back by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features ADCC double gold champ, Gordon Ryan, sharing his signature back attack system consisting of strangles, armlocks, triangles and combinations. Gordon explains and demonstrates these techniques, detailing how he and his coach, Professor John Danaher, have developed them. These methods have been instrumental in his success, including achieving multiple submission wins as a black belt. The video also includes real-time gym breakdowns of Gordon's proven submission game.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The Shoulder Crunch Sumi Gaeshi Sweep From Butterfly Guard by Gordon Ryan (ADCC 2019 Brea…

5m · Gordon Ryan

Summarized Content: In the video, Gordon Ryan demonstrates and teaches the shoulder crunch Sumi Gaeshi sweep from the butterfly guard position which he used against Buchecha in the ADCC 2019 finals. The sweep starts with an arm drag that Ryan uses to get his opponent to post on his shoulder, at this point, he brings his right knee into his chest and places his opponent's hand on the floor above his head, exposing the arm. Ryan emphasizes the importance of keeping his opponent's head next to his and keeping his right elbow up towards the ceiling. From here, he locks his hands together, lifts to his left, then lifts over his right shoulder while maintaining his high right elbow position to sweep his opponent, ending up in a mounted position.

Technique: Shoulder Crunch Sweep Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Sweeps

Straight Foot Lock Escape by Gordon Ryan

59s · Gordon Ryan

The video features Gordon Ryan demonstrating a technique to escape from a straight foot lock. The primary concept is to manipulate the opponent's posture such that their chest goes belly up, thereby making it harder for them to apply force on the lock. As the opponent tries to go belly down, Ryan suggests tilting them using the Ashi Garami grip towards one side to keep them belly up. The aim is to lessen the chances of being submitted by reducing the opponent's capacity to apply body weight onto the lock.

Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking The Guard 2.0 by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, several-time ADCC champion, Gordon Ryan, teaches his unique high-stepping method for effectively passing stubborn guards such as the Reverse De La Riva, De La Riva, and Ashi Garami. Gordon shares his methodology and offers advice on how to apply this system to revolutionize your guard passing game. He emphasizes the potency of the flanking position and the importance of strategically weaponizing the j point. Viewers also get to see this system in action through actual gym footage, broken down by Gordon for a clearer understanding of the moves.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass Sit Guard by GORDON RYAN

55s · Gordon Ryan

This video instructs on how to pass the sit guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Focusing mainly on hand fighting, instructor and BJJ World Champion, Gordon Ryan, emphasizes the importance of movement and breaking the opponent's grip. He suggests feigning with the lead legs, creating angles, and then separating the opponent's elbows from their body, before changing levels and locking onto the opponent's body. This technique ensures safety from sweeps and leg locks, allowing the practitioner to step over the opponent's knee and either pass to side control or move into a half guard, ready for a pass.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan’s Flow - Arm Drag to Single Leg Finish

29s · Gordon Ryan

The video showcases Gordon Ryan demonstrating a takedown transition from an arm drag to a single leg finish. Ryan starts by instigating his opponent into executing a double leg takedown. Subsequently, he counters with an arm drag to initiate a back take. As the opponent counters, Ryan seamlessly switches to a single leg and completes the takedown with control and precision, using a collar tie grip.

Technique: Single Leg Takedown Position: Standing — Leg Control Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Systematically Attacking The Guard: Half Guard Passing by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Gordon Ryan, multiple-time ADCC champion, teaching his half guard passing system, specifically how to systematically attack different kinds of half guards like knee shield, butterfly, lockdown, and deep half guard. This system is optimized for all forms of grappling including no-gi, gi, and MMA. Additional footage of Gordon demonstrating these techniques during rolling in the gym is included, which he further analyzes for thorough understanding. This is an in-depth and comprehensive guide to mastering half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

ESCAPING KNEE ON BELLY by Gordon Ryan

49s · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a top-level BJJ practitioner, demonstrates how to escape the knee on belly position – a popular dominant position in the Brazilian Jiu Jitsu world. The technique involves using your tailbone and leg to disrupt the opponent's balance and change the angle of engagement. From there, he shows how to create the necessary angles to transition into a position known as "backside 50 50", offering opportunities for various locks and breaks. Overall, the video instructs not only on escaping knee on belly but also transitioning into a counter-attack situation.

Position: Knee On Belly Category: Escapes

The Most Basic Principles Of Butterfly And Open Guard by Gordon Ryan

7m · Gordon Ryan

The video features elite Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu athlete Gordon Ryan demonstrating fundamental principles of maintaining a butterfly guard or open guard. Ryan emphasizes the idea of 'sticky hooks,' keeping feet locked into the opponent's thighs to prevent them from passing the guard. He also stresses the need for concave shoulders to create a 'rocking chair effect,' allowing for easy movement and limited energy usage during a match. Furthermore, he discusses the importance of sweeps and categorizes them into two groups: chest-to-chest sweeps and non-chest-to-chest sweeps. Finally, Ryan explains the necessity of maintaining the 'inside real estate' or inside position to prevent the opponent from gaining control.

Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Guard Retention

Systematically Attacking From Closed Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video teaches learners about Gordon Ryan's system for sweeping and submitting opponents from the closed guard position. Developed with John Danaher, the system is designed to be effective regardless of age or skill level. With emphasis on these fundamentals, learners can elevate their closed guard game and improve their overall performance in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Sweep-to-Submission Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

Gordon Ryan Explains His Guard Passing System

6m · Gordon Ryan

This video features Gordon Ryan, a highly proficient no-gi grappler, presenting his innovative Guard Passing System. He introduces a well-structured system that he invented, combining three types of passing: loose pass, tight pass, and submission pass. Ryan thoroughly explains all three concepts and demonstrates how to seamlessly transition between them. He emphasizes the use of a unique leg pummeling technique, using heavy hands and light hips to efficiently manage opponent's legs while passing the guard. This specific guard passing strategy has been instrumental in Ryan's recent competitive success.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Mount Escapes for Blue Belts and ADCC Champions by Gordon Ryan

4m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, BJJ champion Gordon Ryan shares his approach to escaping from the mount position. Specifically, he talks about the situation where your arm is trapped above your head by the opponent. He explains different strategies based on whether your elbow is inside or outside of your opponent's knee. He also offers tips on how to redistribute your opponent's weight by bridging to one side, allowing you to free your arm. Following this, he elaborates on the potential movements to regain control, like a kipping motion or a walkout to secure the inside position with your knee. Finally, Ryan strongly advises against hugging your opponent in a desperate attempt to escape, as this approach is ineffective.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

Getting Swole As A Grappler by Gordon Ryan

$150.00 • BJJ Fanatics

"Gordon Ryan, in this instructional video, talks about the secrets of the most dramatic and effective weight gain & weight cut in the history of grappling. He discusses both how to gain and lose weight while maintaining the body's fighting efficiency. Alongside his strength and conditioning coach, Nathalia Santoro have developed an innovative workout & diet plan. From a skinny kid, Gordon has evolved to an incredibly strong black belt and shares his secrets to reaching new physical heights and fitness."

Category: Other

All About Jiu Jitsu Half Guard No Gi by Gordon Ryan

12m · Gordon Ryan

In the video, Bernardo Faria interviews Gordon Ryan about his preferred half guard strategies when in a NoGi match. Ryan emphasizes the need for a comprehensive guard game, explaining that a successful half guard player needs to also be proficient in open guard, sumo guard, and leg lock game among other things. He demonstrates techniques to elevate from a half guard, present dilemmas for the top player from a knee shield half guard, and how to transition to attacking positions from a deep half guard. He emphasizes that the bigger picture is to interconnect various guard systems starting from a half guard position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

ESCAPING SIDE CONTROL With a HIGH LEG by Gordon Ryan

26s · Gordon Ryan

This video features BJJ black belt, Gordon Ryan, teaching techniques to escape from side control position using the high leg escape technique. When the opponent goes hip to hip, Ryan uses a pendulum movement to take his leg up and over. This forces the opponent to "hide the face" from his high leg. Eventually, Ryan sweeps his legs into a swivel motion, reversing the position entirely and setting himself up in a top head and arm position.

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking From Open Guard Supine Position by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Gordon Ryan, an ADCC Absolute Champion, teaches his proven system of attacking from the Open Guard Supine Position in this instructional video. Ryan demonstrates how to systematically sweep, take the back, perform leg locks, and use no-gi De La Riva variations while in this position. He also explains how to use this system to keep opponents off-balance and the ways to create pressure from the back. Finally, Ryan shows how to flow between various techniques including ashi garami entries, guard passes, and creating back exposure.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

Gordon Ryan's Simple and Effective Side Control Escape

5m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan demonstrates a fundamental side control escape technique in this instructional video. He highlights the importance of creating a "side guard," which is a V-shape formed by the knee and elbow connection. Ryan stresses that creating this connection turns your partner's underhook and crossface from an advantage into a liability. He provides detailed instructions on how to establish this connection and ultimately escape the side control, demonstrating that such connection will allow transitioning from a defensive posture to an offensive one.

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

Gordon Ryan ADCC 2022 Inserting 2nd Hook

15s · Gordon Ryan

This video is a tutorial by Gordon Ryan where he demonstrates how to correctly insert the second hook while in Back Mount in BJJ. He emphasizes the importance of maintaining balance by not positioning oneself too high and always being behind your partner's hips with your knees. He states that at any given point, there must be four points of contact with your partner.

Position: Back Control Category: Positional Control

The Pillars Of Defense: Leg Lock Escapes and Counter Locks by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The Pillars Of Defense: Leg Lock Escapes and Counter Locks by Gordon Ryan is a tutorial series that provides strategies for elite level leg lock and counter lock defenses. The video covers modern techniques used in no-gi grappling and strategies to defend from various locks such as the Achilles lock, toe hold and heel hook. The tutorial covers techniques used in various leg entanglement positions like Irimi Ashi Garami, Outside Ashi, Top Ushiro, Cross Ashi, 50/50, Mutual Ashi, and Inside Ashi Garami. The defenses demonstrated are part of Gordon's tried and proven system.

Position: Submission Escape Category: Escapes

Understanding The Closed Guard by Gordon Ryan

11m · Gordon Ryan

This video features BJJ instructor, Gordon Ryan, detailing how to understand and utilize the no-gi Closed Guard effectively. He explains the strategic use of minor adjustments to gain advantage positions within the closed guard. Two important concepts he highlights are the use of movement to create angles for attacks and the principle of viewing the opponent's spine as a lever. Ryan also emphasizes the importance of controlling your opponent's posture to prevent them from standing up and opening your guard, incorporating knee pulls and misdirection. He concludes by discussing options when the opponent stands up to vertical posture.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

Escaping Closed Guard with Gordon Ryan

15m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, renowned Jiu Jitsu practitioner Gordon Ryan teaches viewers the technique of the standing posture escape from a closed guard. He emphasizes the importance of standing to escape the closed guard, asserting that it reduces the risk of being pulled into submissions. Ryan breaks down the process patiently, demonstrating different grip options and explaining ways to stand effectively while maintaining control. He explains the response to various possible reactions by the opponent and backs his advice with real-life examples from his career.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking The Arm Bar by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is an instructional course by Gordon Ryan that spans over 7 hours and is focused on a systematic, championship-level approach to executing the armbar submission, also known as Juji Gatame. The course includes detailed instruction on different variations of the technique, proper grips, opponents' escape options, and effective strategies. It also highlights the differences between performing the submission from the bottom vs the top position. Specific variations such as the Shoulder Sankaku are emphasized. Gordon's instructions also prepare the student to handle common escape attempts by seamlessly transitioning between different armbar variations to secure a submission.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

Learn How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Body Lock Pass by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches viewers how to execute a perfect Body Lock Pass in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He focuses on three key strategies: "stuffing", "shelving", and "splitting" the opponent's legs to effectively pass their guard while maintaining control. He presents detailed demonstrations on how to transform from a front body lock to a side body lock and back, and explains how to handle potential scenarios, such as the opponent trying to turn and escape. The video also includes tips on how to manage wrist injuries when executing this technique.

Position: Body Lock Category: Guard Passing

Attacks Every Blue Belt Should Know from Mount

4m · Gordon Ryan

The YouTube video "Attacks Every Blue Belt Should Know from Mount" features instructor Gordon Ryan demonstrating techniques to isolate the arm from the mounted position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Ryan dispels common misconceptions about using 'finger walk' as the main mechanism to isolate the arm. He explains that instead of 'finger walking', the practitioner should perform a 'center line shift' which involves moving the head from one side of the opponent's center line to the other while straightening out the arm. Once the opponent's arm is over their shoulder line, the practitioner uses their body position and weight to keep it in place. Ryan emphasizes the importance of correct positioning, rather than muscle strength, to maintain control over the opponent's isolated arm.

Position: Mount Category: Positional Control

The Pillars of Defense: Turtle & Front Headlock Escapes by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video, "The Pillars of Defense: Turtle & Front Headlock Escapes" by Gordon Ryan, provides a detailed system to escape from turtle and front headlocks. The tutorial emphasizes techniques such as peak outs, 4 points, and transitioning to half guard. The video demonstrates how to roll to guard and escape from turtle with specific tips for staying safe and preventing hooks. This systematic approach helps viewers learn to break free from front headlocks as efficiently as possible, with the added benefit of featuring gym footage and breakdowns of each step.

Position: Front Headlock Category: Escapes

Armbar Adjustments by Gordon Ryan

56s · Gordon Ryan

The video features BJJ expert Gordon Ryan explaining and demonstrating armbar adjustments. Ryan discusses common challenges when applying the armbar from the top and bottom positions, focusing particularly on the importance of keeping your knee above your opponent's in either scenario. Ryan's strategies for adjusting the armbar emphasize control and leverage, ensuring that even without grip on the hand, it would be hard for the opponent to escape.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

Hidden Details In The BJJ Tripod Sweep (Open Guard) That You Have Never Seen Before by Go…

7m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a renowned BJJ practitioner, details the intricacies involved in performing a successful Tripod Sweep starting from the Open Guard position. Ryan emphasizes the concept of creating a "stickiness" with the opponent's captured foot to prevent escape. He underscores the importance of not just pushing the opponent backwards, but also elevating their foot off the ground to limit their ability to step out and counter the sweep. Furthermore, Ryan elucidates a variety of techniques to maintain control once the sweep is completed to prevent the opponent from running away or escaping, including shelfing the leg, threatening back control, or even transitioning to leg locks.

Technique: Tripod Sweep Position: Open Guard Category: Sweeps

Systematically Attacking Triangles by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan teaches viewers how to systematically attack a triangle. He presents an 8-part masterclass that covers all variations, setups, and finishes for the technique, with rolling footage and commentary included for additional clarity. The course includes various triangle variations such as the front triangle, side triangle, reverse triangle, and back triangle. It also demonstrates how to execute these techniques from numerous positions while highlighting ideal finishing mechanics.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

Highly Effective Habits to Improve your Jiu Jitsu with Gordon Ryan and Garry Tonon

9m · Gordon Ryan

This YouTube video features Jiu-Jitsu icons Gordon Ryan and Garry Tonon as they unpack valuable habits to cultivate for effective BJJ performance. Ryan focuses on habit-building for guard passing, stressing the importance of flanking rather than aligning with the opponent and explains how to resist leg entanglement for guard passing dominance. Tonon, on the other hand, shares insights on late-stage guard retention, teaching viewers how to recover even when the opponent is closing the distance. Strategies shared include posting on the partner's shoulders, manipulating body exposure, and leveraging different recovery options that also create potential base points for submissions.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

Gordon Ryan one how to study and progress in jiu jitsu #bjj #gordonryan

51s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan offers insight into how to study and progress quickly in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes breaking down positions to identify the central problems, and then working out the mechanical solutions to these problems. Using side control as an example, he explains the strategy of connecting the knees and the elbows to recover guard, and how to prevent this from an offensive perspective.

Position: Side Control Category: Concepts/Strategy

Systematically Attacking The Kimura by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, ADCC champion Gordon Ryan provides a detailed teaching of his systematic approach to attacking the Kimura from various situations. He explains how Kimura can be used as a controlling position as well as a submission, and emphasizes the importance of techniques in real-time motion. The video includes training footage of Gordon executing the Kimura in a genuine rolling situation, followed by a thorough breakdown of what he does and why. The video aims to give viewers an understanding of the complete Kimura system as employed by one of the greatest No-Gi grapplers in the world.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

The Easiest Way to Dominate Closed Guard - Gordon Ryan

6m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan offers guidance on retaining Closed Guard position. He instructs viewers on key fundamental elements to effectively control and attack from bottom Closed Guard. He emphasizes the use of movement and angling by pulling the knees to the chest, thereby off-balancing the opponent and drawing them in. Thereafter, he suggests the creation of angles through pivots made off the opponent's hips. From the top Closed Guard, Ryan advises standing up to a vertical posture to minimize the risk of being pulled into submissions. He also gives brief insights on dealing with any counteractions from the opponent.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Retention

ESCAPING KESA GATAME by Gordon Ryan

26s · Gordon Ryan

This video features BJJ world champion Gordon Ryan demonstrating how to escape from Kesa Gatame, a common judo hold. Ryan teaches to maintain shoulder contact with the floor and create pressure by pulling the chin towards the chest. He then demonstrates how to off-balance the opponent by angling out and creating a pendulum swing. If the opponent tries to adjust, he advises inserting a side guard to regain control.

Position: Kesa Gatame Category: Escapes

Systematically Attacking the Turtle Position by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features instructor Gordon Ryan who thoroughly explains and demonstrates his approach to attacking the turtle position step-by-step, focusing on handfighting, setting traps, and sinking hooks for back control. The approach taught in the video is largely responsible for Ryan's successful back control and submissions, with notable success in the ADCC. The instructional video is part of an eight-volume series that showcases how Ryan strategically gets to his opponents' backs and sinks in fight ending strangles. His methodical and detailed technique is easy to understand, setting the course for other grapplers wanting to improve their turtle position attacking techniques.

Technique: Back Take Position: Turtle Category: Positional Control

Gordon Ryan Toreando to Knee on Belly

48s · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan presents a detailed explanation and demonstration of the Toreando Pass to a Knee on Belly position. He emphasizes the importance of closing the gap between his knees to prevent the partner from entering his legs. Ryan also demonstrates the transition to a head overhead position as a counter to the partner's attempts to off balance him. He further suggests using his hands to push back towards the partner's hips as a response to their bridging attempts.

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Knee On Belly Category: Guard Passing

How To Perfect Leglocks In Jiu Jitsu No Gi by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

The YouTube video features Instructor Gordon Ryan teaching different leglock techniques in No Gi Jiu Jitsu. In the video, he specifically addresses the correlation between upper body and lower body attacks. He stresses the importance of obtaining control over the legs, being fluid through positions, and then, ultimately, the breaking mechanics. He advises viewers to have strong breaking mechanics for both inside and outside heel hooks. A large part of the video focuses on explaining and demonstrating the mechanics of transitioning from the cross Ashi Garami position to the Inside Ashi position to successfully achieve an outside heel hook.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Leg Locks

The Sport of Kings: High Performance Mindset For Grappling by Gordon Ryan

$150.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features multiple time ADCC champ Gordon Ryan sharing his insight on how to cultivate a high performance mindset for grappling. He provides advice on how to train, compete, and live a lifestyle conducive to maximizing success in jiu-jitsu. He explains how he achieved his confident demeanor and offers a breakdown on his approach to competition, from warming up to game planning. Throughout the video, Ryan utilizes real-life examples from his career to demonstrate how he has developed his mental strength.

Category: Concepts/Strategy

The Difference Between The BJJ Berimbolo With Gi And No Gi by Gordon Ryan

10m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan shows and explains the difference between performing the Berimbolo technique with a Gi and No-Gi in this instructional video. He demonstrates that when performing a Berimbolo in Gi, it's easy to create upper back exposure due to the availability of grips on the fabric. However, without a Gi, creating upper back exposure can be challenging because there aren't as many grip options. Ryan further demonstrates that without the Gi, you're left primarily with the choice of sweeping your opponent or going for leg attacks. He concludes the tutorial by demonstrating a transition from the Berimbolo into a leg attack.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Berimbolo Category: Transitions

BJJ Techniques: Wrist Control to Arm Bar by Gordon Ryan

3m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, renowned grappler Gordon Ryan provides tutelage on how to execute an arm bar from a closed guard using a concept of wrist control. He initially discusses two primary methods of entering a Jujigatame with a top lock, then briefly on the concept of working with speed rather than wedges around the opponent's shoulders. The technique involves grabbing the opponent's wrist, creating a slight off-balance in the opponent by pulling the knee, and throwing the legs to a position over the opponent's ear. Overall, the tutorial exemplifies a speed-based approach towards Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Armbar Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

The Pillars of Defense: Back Escapes by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan elaborates on a complete back control escape system. His method includes hand fighting, breaking body triangle, and the introduction of defensive strategies from the straight jacket position. He further explains the techniques with the help of live sparring breakdowns, which he uses to analyze and demonstrate the maneuvers in action. These systems and strategies are the ones he uses at the elite levels of no-gi grappling.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Escapes

HIDING YOUR JAW FROM A CROSSFACE - Gordon Ryan

26s · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan illustrates how to avoid getting caught in a crossface while in a bottom position. He emphasizes the importance of hiding the jaw and maintaining a concave shoulder position. He demonstrates the movement in position against a training partner. This technique helps to effectively clear the crossface, allowing a practitioner to regain control.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Survival/Defense

Gordon Ryan - Body Lock Guard Pass Off Their Underhook

3m · Gordon Ryan

The YouTube video hosted by BJJ Fanatics features the world-famous Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioner Gordon Ryan demonstrating a body lock guard pass from half guard when the opponent manages to get an underhook. Ryan stresses on the importance of maintaining a body lock to control the opponent's upper body, and using a butterfly hook to control the space between the opponent's knees. As a result, the practitioner is more likely to be successful in passing the guard and obtaining a secure top side control position.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Pillars of Defense: Upper Body Joint Lock Escapes by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Gordon Ryan, a multiple-time ADCC champion, teaching systematic ways to escape from upper body joint locks including armbars, kimuras, and omoplatas. He not only instructs on how to escape these submission techniques, but also offers strategies on transitioning from defense to offense, demonstrated with actual rolling footage from the gym. The video's focus lies in its conceptually powerful lessons on creating space and countering with offensive cycles including entries to leg locks and back takes.

Technique: Armbar Position: Submission Category: Escapes

Gordon Ryan on how to face bigger opponents. #bjj #jiujitsu #gordonryan

1m · Gordon Ryan

The video features instructor Gordon Ryan sharing his strategy for dealing with larger opponents in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He emphasizes the importance of maintaining an inside position, particularly when playing from the bottom. By keeping the elbows inside the shoulders, feet inside the opponent's hips, and knees inside the opponent's knees and hips, it helps to prevent the opponent from overpowering you. He adds this approach allows you to carry weight on frames rather than chest-to-chest, making it easier to counter larger, stronger opponents.

Position: Bottom Position Category: Concepts/Strategy

Gordon Ryan - Triangle Variations in Closed Guard

4m · Gordon Ryan

In the video, Gordon Ryan, a renowned BJJ champion, demonstrates how to effectively apply variations of the triangle choke from a closed guard position. He explains two specific goals to aim for: getting the opponent's elbow across the center line for a direct attack or establishing an angular advantage by separating the opponent's elbow from their body. Additionally, he demonstrates transitioning into a motaisenkaku (traditional triangle choke) and provides a solution in the event the opponent defends correctly, suggesting a switch to a hantaisenkaku (reverse triangle choke). The video emphasizes elements like grip control, knee positioning, and transitioning fluently between techniques.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

Pillars of Defense: Strangle Escapes by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, multiple-time ADCC champion, Gordon Ryan, teaches viewers how to effectively escape from various types of strangleholds and triangle submissions. Ryan provides detailed techniques and strategies for early and late escapes, along with methods for preventing submissions. The video also includes actual rolling footage from the gym, with Ryan breaking down each move to highlight the practical application of the techniques.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Escapes

Escaping the mount Choosing the escape based on where their weight is placed

9m · Lachlan Giles

The video features BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles teaching viewers on how to escape the mount using the redistribution of opponent's weight. He explains that escaping depends on where the opponent's weight is placed. The instructor emphasizes blocking the opponent's hips, having the correct forearm placement, utilizing the elbow against opponent's knee and getting the leg in a flat position to trap the opponent's ankle. Finally, Lachlan suggests squaring up and using a frame to complete the escape.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

3 BJJ Chokes That Everybody Should Know by Lachlan Giles (Amazing Details)

15m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles demonstrates three essential BJJ chokes. Each technique is being described with relevant details to maximize its effectiveness. Giles begins with the Rear Naked Choke, covering the importance of falling to the underhook side and securing the head with your arm and counter-pressure from your head, among other key pointers. He then proceeds to Guillotine and Arm Triangle chokes, explaining their specific details to ensure a successful submission. Giles emphasizes the practicality and high-percentage success rate of these chokes in competitive BJJ.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The Half Guard Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide by Lachlan Giles, an ADCC Veteran and renowned BJJ coach, introducing his half guard strategy for Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. The content covers techniques to manipulate opponents from half guard using their weight against them, detailed instructions to sweep and submit from half guard. The guide, with over 10 hours of content, also reveals Lachlan's trade secrets to mastering the half guard game.

Technique: Sweep-to-Submission Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Linking 4 different side control escapes (Lachlan Giles)

9m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, instructor Lachlan Giles covers four different side control escapes in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The video primarily focuses on situations where the opponent controls the hips but lacks control on the upper body. The techniques involve using both hands to control the opponent's elbow, rolling onto the elbow, and recovering guard or standing up. Special emphasis is given on linking these escape strategies together for maximum efficiency during a match.

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

Half Guard Kimura Series - As Seen on EBI 5 (Lachlan Giles)

9m · Lachlan Giles

This video is a detailed instructional by Lachlan Giles on the Half Guard Kimura Series, which he used in competition at EBI 5. Lachlan firstly delves into the importance of maintaining pressure on the opponent's wrist and hip to prevent them from achieving an armbar, even when they pass guard. He then demonstrates various strategies when the opponent is outside the legs, including a north-south approach, armbars, back takes, and jumps over the head. This variety of techniques creates an expansive "Kimura trap" system.

Technique: Kimura Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

High Percentage Chokes: No Gi by Lachlan Giles

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional course by Lachlan Giles focusing on high-percentage chokes in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Giles, widely recognized as a top Australian grappler, explains how these specific chokes can be efficiently used to maximize success in both practice and competition situations. The material taught aims to enhance one's no-gi skills, specifically targeting effective choking techniques.

Position: Submission Category: Submissions

5 Tips To Pass Any Guard No Gi by Lachlan Giles

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this YouTube video, Lachlan Giles provides five practical tips on passing the guard in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes controlling the shins rather than the knees, pushing away the opponent's feet instead of allowing them to contact his torso, and gaining "inside position" on the opponent's legs to prevent their escape. Additionally, he highlights the importance of upper body control and demonstrates a handy technique to win the "inside space" during hand fighting.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The best way to escape side control (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, BJJ black belt and accomplished grappler, Lachlan Giles teaches viewers how to escape side control using the 'Basic Hip Escape' technique. He describes two main ways to escape side control - the hip escape and getting to knees. Giles emphasizes the importance of creating space and establishing frames to successfully execute escape. Throughout the video, he demonstrates each move slowly and provides a detailed breakdown, making it easy to understand and replicate.

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

Leg Lock Anthology: 50/50 by Lachlan Giles

$74.50 • BJJ Fanatics

In Lachlan Giles's tutorial, he focuses on demonstrating and explaining his signature submission technique, the heel hook from a 50/50 position. As a 2019 ADCC medalist, Giles offers vast insights into his unique submission system that made a significant impact at the ADCC 2019. The video is heavily geared towards thorough understanding and execution of the heel hook technique, featuring narration over training and competition footage for detailed analysis of Giles's decision-making process during fights.

Technique: Heel Hook Category: Leg Locks

6 approaches to passing the knee shield (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles, a notable BJJ black belt, demonstrates six approaches to passing the knee shield while in half guard. Giles emphasizes the importance of forethought and prevention in dealing with the knee shield, suggesting to ideally block the knee shield before it fully forms. The video goes on to cover various techniques such as walking back to center, pushing the hip or foot, and swinging the hips in front of the leg for successful guard passing strategies against the knee shield. All these strategies are explained with detailed steps and practical tips for when these approaches would be most effective during a BJJ match.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

No Gi Pendulum Sweep and Arm Bar from Closed Guard (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

The video is an instructional demonstration by 2nd degree BJJ Black Belt, Lachlan Giles on executing No Gi Pendulum Sweep and an Arm Bar from the Closed Guard position. He starts with explaining the importance of blocking one of opponent's posts by cupping the elbow and moving your hips out to create space. Then, he guides on reaching one hand through the created gap, pulling towards the knee. Finally, he emphasises on doing a pendulum motion with legs to sweep the opponent over, while ensuring correct muscle use.

Technique: Armbar Position: Closed Guard Category: Sweeps

Fundamentals of Brazilian Jiu Jitsu Escapes Gi & No Gi by Lachlan Giles

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Lachlan Giles teaches the fundamentals of escaping in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu, both in gi and no-gi. He provides techniques and strategies on how to escape from different positions such as mount, back, and side control. Viewers can also learn about understanding the threats from each position, staying safe, and finding their path back to safety. The video also includes sparring from bad positions with narration to understand the techniques better.

Position: Mount Category: Escapes

How To Do The Perfect BJJ K Guard by Lachlan Giles

7m · Lachlan Giles

In this YouTube video, Lachlan Giles outlines the steps and strategies employed to execute a successful sweep from the K Guard position. Giles explains the importance of off-balancing the opponent, and demonstrates how to exploit this to lift and manoeuvre the opponent's leg to a more advantageous position. Techniques also include using the K Guard position to potentially expose the opponent's back, hinting on other available options such as the inside heel hook and pass across move in the 70-30 position, which gives the practitioner stronger control and safety whilst executing the sweep.

Technique: K-Guard Sweep Position: K Guard Category: Guard Retention

5 tips to improve your guard retention (Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak)

9m · Lachlan Giles

This video features BJJ practitioners Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak sharing five key tips to enhance your guard retention. The instructors explain the necessity of ensuring that your upper body always follows your lower body, keeping knees close to your chest, and incorporating a high pummel as an alternative to a traditional hip escape. They also stress the detrimental impact of reaching out legs and creating space during a guard position. The teachings aim to help viewers improve their guard game and make it more impervious to passes.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

No Gi Open Guard Volume 1: K Guard by Lachlan Giles

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a tutorial on the No-Gi Open Guard technique, specifically the K Guard, led by Lachlan Giles. It provides insights into leg locks, sweeps and back attacks to enable the learner to effectively overcome bigger opponents. Giles demonstrates the systematic strategies and game plans essential for mastering the K Guard roll leading to devastating locks including the 50/50 inside heel hook. The tutorial further includes strategies for attacking grapplers in different positions such as standing, kneeling, and during guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

Linking attacks from Single leg X guard (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

Lachlan Giles instructs on how to link attacks from Single Leg X Guard position in BJJ. He starts by explaining the importance of the control position, with your outside foot on the opponent's hip and your knee touching your heel. He presents three different sweep options depending on your opponent's responses. Firstly, if you can reach the far leg, you can square up and sweep your opponent directly back. Secondly, if the far leg is out of reach, you can apply a twisting motion while keeping your legs tightly around theirs to off-balance and sweep them. Lastly, if the opponent drops their knee to the mat, you can loop under their leg to off-balance them and come up on top.

Position: Single Leg X Guard Category: Transitions

Finishing from side control depending on the reaction of the near arm (Lachlan Giles)

11m · Lachlan Giles

The video features instructor Lachlan Giles teaching several techniques on managing and advancing from the side control position in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. Giles presents three different methods to deal with the near arm of the opponent when they are framing against the attacker. Techniques include turning hips to lessen the effectiveness of the opponent's frame, reaching for the elbow to lift it from the ground and transition to an underhook, and controlling the wrist to pin the arm and turn the opponent’s head away. The lesson emphasizes the importance of understanding and reacting suitably to the opponent's defensive tactics.

Position: Side Control Category: Positional Control

The Guard Passing Anthology: Half Guard by Lachlan Giles

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The instructional video by Lachlan Giles covers the techniques of passing half guard. He offers more than 10 hours of educational content which aims to dramatically elevate the BJJ game of the viewer. The course also explores how to manipulate the opponent from the half guard, use their weight against them for passing, and techniques for mounting and taking the back from half guard. The sheer length and extensive detail ensure a comprehensive understanding of all the secrets to half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

How To Do The Heel Hook Against Bigger And Stronger Opponents by Lachlan Giles (ADCC 2019…

16m · Lachlan Giles

The video features Lachlan Giles, known for his success against larger opponents during the 2019 ADCC, demonstrating his technique for applying the heel hook. Giles emphasizes the importance of the specifics of his leg entanglement position and entries, which he claims differ from the common practices at the time. Giles suggests that his methods offered more success against larger opponents, as these allowed him to retain the use of his legs as his "strongest weapon." He then goes through one pathway of his heel hook technique, which he used against Muhammad Ali, a significantly heavier competitor.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Submissions

K guard is the best for leg entanglement entries: Inside vs outside position (Lachlan Gil…

6m · Lachlan Giles

In this instructional video, Lachlan Giles explains why he chooses to enter a leg entanglement from the K-Guard using outside position instead of the more commonly utilised inside position. He discusses the dangers of utilizing inside leg position, stating that any flubs in the process can lead to the opponent gaining a superior position. In contrast, outside leg position provides a safer approach, as even if the opponent blocks the entry, the practitioner is still in their guard. Lachlan then demonstrates an entry into leg entanglement from the K-Guard, emphasizing the use of edge of the foot on the outside of the hip, knee on the inside and foot under the opponent's armpit.

Position: K Guard Category: Leg Locks

The Body Lock Pass by Lachlan Giles

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video teaches the technique of executing the Body Lock Pass, a powerful tool for passing guards in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Lachlan Giles, an ADCC veteran and world medalist, breaks down the strategy behind the body lock passing system in a comprehensive, step-by-step, 6-volume course. In addition to detailed explanations, the course includes narrated rolling footage for students to learn how to apply the technique in actual sparring situations.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Body Lock Category: Guard Passing

Guard Recovery and Inverting (Lachlan Giles)

13m · Lachlan Giles

This instructional video led by BJJ black belt, Lachlan Giles, provides a comprehensive overview on guard recovery and inverting from the open guard position. He emphasizes the importance of inverting as a fundamental technique to maintain the guard. Giles explains that if the opponent moves fast, it's impossible to catch them by swinging the legs, and the practitioner should instead focus on inverting to recover the guard. He demonstrates techniques on how to lift hips off the ground, maintain contact with the opponent, and conduct the inversion effectively, offering students a chance for practical application.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

Recovering from the Turtle (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

In this YouTube video, instructor Lachlan Giles teaches the technique of recovery from the turtle position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). BJJ is a martial art and combat sport that focuses on grappling with an emphasis on ground fighting. Giles emphasizes the importance of blocking the opponent's arm and lifting the hips to escape this position. Additionally, it is important to quickly transition from the turtle position due to its defensive disadvantage.

Position: Turtle Category: Escapes

The Straight Armlock Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, ADCC Medalist Lachlan Giles teaches the viewers how to execute a straight armlock from various positions. Emphasis is given to troubleshooting escapes and improving submission rate. The video aims to provide techniques for combining straight arm locks, armbars, and more to effectively finish submission holds in commonly encountered grappling situations such as side control, closed guard, back attacks, and open guard. Additionally, the video includes footage of Lachlan rolling with his students and giving a running commentary of his implementations of the techniques taught.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

The Body Lock Pass: Standard version

5m · Lachlan Giles

This video features instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrating the steps of a body lock pass from the half guard position. He emphasizes preventing the opponent's leg from reaching the outside, using an underhook and one's own body positioning to block the opponent's leg, and shifting the opponent's hips to the side to improve positioning. After achieving the body lock, the instructor demonstrates how to step over the opponent's leg, shift hips and shoulder position, and eventually move into side control or mount as the situation allows. He also covers common defenses the opponent might use and how to counter them.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Z Guard to Williams Guard to Triangle Sequence (Lachlan Giles)

12m · Lachlan Giles

This video is an instructional content by Lachlan Giles wherein he teaches a complex transition between three positions: Z Guard, Williams Guard, and finalizing it with a Triangle submission. He begins by demonstrating the initial position, the Z Guard, before showing how to transition to the Williams Guard. From the Williams Guard position, he then shows how to execute a Triangle submission. Lachlan emphasizes on the necessity of flexibility in these movements, and the video offers clear, step-by-step instructions to precisely execute the whole sequence.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Z Guard Category: Transitions

Guard Retention Anthology Bundle by Lachlan Giles & Ariel Tabak

$247.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is a promotional material for a 16-part instructional series on guard retention by BJJ champions Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak. They teach how to defend against various guard passes like knee cuts, half guard passes, smash passes, and headquarters position. The instructionals cover a variety of guard retention strategies and techniques, and they are accompanied by live rolling footage of the instructors demonstrating these concepts in the gym. The course claims to be one of the most comprehensive and detailed instructionals on guard retention.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Inside Heel Hook: Setup and Safety (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrates how to effectively execute the Inside Heel Hook from the saddle position. This particular type of heel hook is recognized for its potential to cause substantial injury if not performed or defended properly. The instructor places emphasis on leg control, especially to prevent his training partner from freeing his knee, before moving on to the heel hook setup. The significance of correct hand and arm positions when securing the heel is highlighted, and Giles explains how to achieve maximum control of the opponent's foot. He also discusses strategies for preventing the opponent from escaping and emphasizes the importance of safety when applying this technique.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Leg Locks

Understanding Guard Passing: Concepts & Heuristics (Lachlan Giles)

31m · Lachlan Giles

In this instructional video, BJJ black belt Lachlan Giles explains various concepts and strategies for guard passing. He starts by discussing the importance of directing your opponent's attention away from your actions and working through positions of high stability, which he refers to as "staging positions." He goes on to explain how to single-side the opponent's hips to limit their defensive options, misdirect their frames to overcome defensive barriers, and work through layers of the guard. The concepts discussed in the video are fundamental in nature and apply to various techniques for passing the guard.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

No Gi Open Guard Volume 2: De La Riva & Waiter by Lachlan Giles

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is presented by Lachlan Giles, a renowned ADCC Absolute bronze medalist. Giles focuses on the De La Riva & Waiter Open Guard techniques in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He provides strategies and systems to ensure robust open guard positioning which keeps opponents on the defensive. He also provides guidance on securing effective leg locks and high percentage sweeps. The instructional content is organized into an 8-part series that caters to both basic and advanced concepts of BJJ.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

Triangle from Closed Guard w/ Over-hook (Lachlan Giles)

14m · Lachlan Giles

The video features Lachlan Giles demonstrating how to execute a triangle choke from a closed guard with an over-hook. Giles explains the importance of breaking the opponent's posture, obtaining a high over-hook, and using the hip and legs effectively to execute the choke. He also demonstrates how to prevent opponent's defense by positioning the knee and maintaining control over the shoulder. The video is divided into two parts, structuring the choke and later finishing it.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

Escaping the back . Pay attention to the leg work (Lachlan Giles)

7m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, BJJ Black Belt Lachlan Giles demonstrates an escape from back control. He emphasizes the importance of grip safety to avoid submissions and demonstrates a specific method of gripping the opponent's wrist. He then shows how to effectively use legwork to disengage the opponent, even when the opponent maintains a foot across the hip, which makes escape more difficult. Giles also introduces the concept of turning one's hips to hook one of the opponent's ankles and free oneself from the back control position.

Position: Back Control Category: Escapes

The guard Retention Anthology: Around and Under by Lachlan Giles & Ariel Tabak

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Summary: This instructional video, part of an 8-part series, features ADCC medalist Lachlan Giles and black belt Ariel Tabak teaching the art of guard retention. They teach strategies and techniques aimed at helping practitioners defend against torreandos, stack passes, leg drags, and more. Viewers will learn tips on how to maintain the guard, improve positions, and get back on the attack. The video includes live rolling footage showing these techniques being applied against other grapplers.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The main sweep to know from half guard (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

The YouTube video by Lachlan Giles explains the Underhook Sweep technique from the Half Guard position. Giles emphasizes the importance of a high underhook and attachment to the opponent's far hip. He further points out common mistakes to avoid and how to effectively transition from underhook to achieving the sweep. Furthermore, Giles demonstrates the roll under sweep as a countermove when the opponent pressures back. The instructional video is very detailed and offers a step-by-step guide on how to successfully execute these sweeps from the Half Guard.

Technique: Underhook Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

Which style of guard do you play? The pros and cons (Lachlan Giles)

15m · Lachlan Giles

The video features BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles giving an in-depth breakdown of various styles of guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, with a focus on how the position of the legs (inside, outside, or one in one out) affects the effectiveness and congruency of the guard. He gives pros and cons of each style, explaining how the leg position impacts available attacks, defense, and transitions into leg entanglements. Lachlan emphasizes the importance of understanding these concepts to structure an effective and congruent guard game. He also briefly addresses how these positions can apply to MMA.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

No Gi Open Guard Volume 3: RDLR & Leg Entanglements by Lachlan Giles

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features ADCC medalist, Lachlan Giles, teaching techniques for mastering the no-gi open guard, focusing on the Reverse De La Riva (RDLR) and Leg entanglements system. He provides instructions on how to use RDLR guard to retain guard and launch attacks, including options to invert and not invert. He also demonstrates how to enter into the legs using single leg X and X guard options, guiding on how to transition to stronger positions and do heel hooks systematically.

Technique: Sweep Systems Position: Reverse De La Riva Guard Category: Guard Retention

I did this wrong for so long. Finishing mechanics of the triangle

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this instructional video, Lachlan Giles, a second degree BJJ black belt and international competitor, teaches the correct finish mechanics of the triangle choke. Noting a common mistake that practitioners often make, he underscores the importance of positioning and threat application for an effective submission hold. He further emphasizes precise leg placement and explains how to choke out the opponent using maximum leg tension rather than simply squeezing. Giles insists that upon mastering this technique, one should be able to secure a submission without locking in the triangle, although the latter becomes necessary in resistant opponents.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

Closed guard to the back (Lachlan Giles)

11m · Lachlan Giles

The video features BJJ Ace Lachlan Giles demonstrating a transition from the closed guard using the arm across technique to take the opponent's back. He discusses the importance of the arm-across as a fundamental feature of effective closed guard playing. He first explains about getting the opponent's arm across the body, managing their reaction, and then breaking their posture. He narrates the detailed steps in handling the hand and the elbow to get it across effectively. He then shows how to transition towards taking the back by maintaining no space between the bodies, managing posture, and dealing with potential resistance from the opponent holistically. This video is clear, insightful, and contains a wealth of knowledge for improving one's BJJ game.

Technique: Back Take Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

The Kimura Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video from Lachlan Giles provides an extensive exploration of the Kimura, a widely used submission in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Giles takes viewers through the process of setting up, finishing, and troubleshooting this move, as well as its many variances. He also demonstrates how to get to the Kimura from a variety of positions including closed guard, half guard, guard passing, and more, providing meticulous details and tips for navigating common defenses. Additionally, he shows how the Kimura can be combined with other attacks for a more robust and aggressive game.

Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

The Top 5 Jiu Jitsu Guard Retention Mistakes by Lachlan Giles And Ariel Tabak

7m · Lachlan Giles

This video, featuring instructors Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak, focuses on teaching about the top five mistakes when retaining guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). The instructors discuss common mistakes that include failing to establish a frame before pulling guard, allowing your spine to twist, framing late, putting feet on the floor, and accepting the opponent advancing through layers of guard. The instructors aim to help students understand and fix these mistakes in order to improve their guard retention skills.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Mounted triangle (Lachlan Giles)

10m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, second degree BJJ black belt Lachlan Giles instructs viewers on how to execute a mounted triangle from the mount position, a tricky but potent submission technique. He emphasizes on the necessity of good positioning and controlling the opponent’s arms to set up the submission. Giles then demonstrates the correct movements, instructing viewers to pin the opponent’s wrist, raise their hips, and utilize their own body weight to lift the opponent's shoulder off of the ground. The video focuses particularly on the execution of the mounted triangle but does not delve into the finishing details.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Mount Category: Submissions

The Guard Retention Anthology: Through The Legs and Close Range by Lachlan Giles & Ariel…

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this comprehensive 8-part instructional video, ADCC medalist Lachlan Giles and Black Belt Ariel Tabak go in-depth into guard retention techniques, specifically focusing on 'Through The Legs and Close Range' methods. Viewers are taught defensive strategies against various forms of guard passes and effective tips to retain and improve their guard position. Techniques from the course are showcased in real-time with rolling footage from the instructors. The series is presented as one of the most detailed instructionals on guard retention.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Defending and escaping the saddle (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

This video, guided by BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles, educates viewers on how to escape the saddle position, specifically from a heel hook. Giles emphasizes the importance of keeping the leg straight and turning the knee and toes inwards to decrease the opponent's grip on the heel. He then describes the counter-intuitive method of moving towards the right and points the toes down. Giles also explains a technique for disengaging from the opponent by rolling and creating gaps that allow for the leg's withdrawal with the help of free leg kicking and the hands pushing the opponent's legs away. He warns against diverting attention towards attacks on the free leg, stating that focus must be maintained on escaping the trapped one.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Escapes

Far armbar from side control (Lachlan Giles)

9m · Lachlan Giles

Lachlan Giles, a top-ranking BJJ competitor and instructor, presents a detailed instructional video on how to effectively implement a far armbar from side control. He begins by introducing the initial position and the desired movement of the opponent's arm. Giles then moves on to demonstrate the gradual transitioning into the armbar while retaining control, prevent escape strategies, and maintain applied pressure. He emphasizes the importance of body positioning and movement to ensure the success of the technique while also preventing the opponent from flattening out and escaping.

Technique: Armbar Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

The No Gi Open Guard Bundle by Lachlan Giles

$249.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is an instructional series by ADCC Medalist Lachlan Giles on mastering various techniques in No-Gi Open Guard. It covers a range of techniques from K Guard to De La Riva, Reverse De La Riva, single leg X, X Guard and leg locks. Giles demonstrates how to enter into and transition through these positions, maintain guard, and launch attacks. He also elaborates on the 70/30 heel hook position, spotlighting a systematic approach to executing a heel hook.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Retention

The Perfect Way To Use The De La Riva Guard No Gi Avoiding The Saddle by Lachlan Giles

7m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrates techniques to effectively use the De La Riva guard in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu while also avoiding the saddle position. One of his key points is maintaining a shallow De La Riva hook on the near leg of the opponent to prevent them from stepping over the knee line. Giles also instructs to use your foot to push your opponent’s hips to the mat and then to transition to a deeper hook once they’re down, keeping in mind the risk potential for your knee. Giles asserts that turning the hips down and facing the knee downwards while rolling will save the knee and offer an opportunity to attack the back.

Position: De La Riva Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Sweep Wrestlers From BJJ Half Guard by Lachlan Giles

10m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles shares his approach to sweeping wrestlers from the half guard position. Giles emphasizes the necessity to get an underhook and anchor the opponent to prevent backing away, using the knee shield and elbow to create an effective barrier. He also demonstrates how to leverage a wrestler's pressure to carry out a sweep. The video serves as a useful tool in learning the intricacies of half guard sweeps, specifically against opponents with a wrestling background.

Technique: Wrestling-Based Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

The Saddle by Lachlan Giles

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Lachlan Giles, a renowned expert in the field of Jiu-Jitsu, presents an instructional masterclass on the Saddle position. He dives into techniques like heel hooks, cloverleaf, Aoki locks, and straight ankle attacks. Giles discusses advanced principles and methods to control your opponent and apply successful submissions. He also demonstrates each concept in live training and discusses troubleshooting methods for defensive reactions such as hiding the heel and roll outs.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Leg Entanglement Saddle Category: Leg Locks

Escaping north south and choosing the correct escape based on arm position (Lachlan Giles)

12m · Lachlan Giles

The video, taught by Lachlan Giles, teaches how to escape from the North-South position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Giles emphasizes the importance of correct arm positioning for successful escape. He begins by demonstrating how to shift from framing on the hip to framing in front of the shoulder to make space and get the knees in front, ultimately recovering guard. Giles also shows how to use the legs to create space and pummel the arms back in if initially unsuccessful with securing the first frame. Through a series of repetitions, he advises on how to handle resistance and defensive opponent movements.

Position: North South Category: Escapes

Kneebars from Back-step and 50/50 (Lachlan Giles)

9m · Lachlan Giles

This video features BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrating how to perform kneebars from back-step and 50/50 positions. Lynch starts off with a back-step and progresses into a transition, stressing the importance of controlling the opponent's movements with proper position and grip. He gives an in-depth explanation of how subtle changes in the angle of the knee and hip can significantly impact the effectiveness of the kneebar. His techniques revolve around stopping the rotation of the opponent and getting a secure grip to extend their leg, leading to a successful kneebar.

Technique: Kneebar Position: Leg Entanglement 50 50 Category: Submissions

Omoplata by Lachlan Giles

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, top-tier competitor and renowned coach Lachlan Giles covers a range of techniques related to the Omoplata submission, discussing its effectiveness and versatility. Geared for both Gi and No-Gi variations, the video offers solutions for common problems, such as breaking the posture of standing or kneeling opponents and preventing arm release. Giles also provides strategies to tackle opponents who roll through during the Omoplata, including the re-roll and the crucifix, and introduces the monoplata attack, broadening viewers' Omoplata proficiency.

Technique: Omoplata Position: Omoplata Category: Submissions

X Guard: Entry from Butterfly, Controlling the Position, and Sweep (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles, a second degree BJJ black belt and renowned competitor, provides a detailed demonstration on how to enter into the X Guard from Butterfly Guard and execute a sweep. He emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's position to facilitate the move. This involves using both your legs and arms in a specific manner: exerting outward pressure with your legs, and gripping your opponent's knee with your hand. He also details how to maintain control and counter common methods of escaping the X Guard.

Position: X Guard Category: Sweeps

Mastering the Choi Bar: A Step-by-Step Guide (Lachlan Giles)

10m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles teaches two variations of the Choi Bar Armbar from guard, a common submission in modern jiu-jitsu. Giles first details how to execute the technique based on the positioning of the opponent's elbow and then focuses on preventing the opponent from countering the submission through effective leg positioning. Subsequently, he emphasizes the importance of maintaining control over the opponent's posture throughout the execution of the technique. Finally, Giles provides a step-by-step demonstration of the two different variations depending on where the opponent places their hand.

Technique: Armbar Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Under the Legs Passing Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, renowned instructor Lachlan Giles delivers a comprehensive, 6-part course on one of the most efficient guard passing mechanisms - 'Under the Legs Passing'. This includes strategies such as double under, over-under, single under, and single under with a knee pin. Giles covers how to handle various guard systems like K-guard, inverted guards, as well as dealing with leg lock threats. The tutorial emphasizes on integrating these various techniques into a cohesive and robust passing game.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The invert is a fundamental movement in jiu jitsu... is it bad for you? (Dr Lachlan Giles)

4m · Lachlan Giles

The video is a tutorial by Dr. Lachlan Giles about the concept and technique of inverting in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He addresses common concerns about the safety of the move, pointing out that the key is to invert safely and correctly to avoid injuries. The instructor emphasizes the importance of good hamstring mobility, which minimizes strain on the neck and the lower back. Giles then demonstrates the correct way to invert using his own body, highlighting the dangers of putting weight on your neck or forcing the inversion when it's not possible.

Position: Inverted Guard Category: Concepts/Strategy

Reverse De La Riva 101 (Lachlan Giles)

11m · Lachlan Giles

In this instructional video, Lachlan Giles explains the basics of the Reverse De La Riva guard, specifically focusing on guard recovery. He demonstrates how to create the guard by hooking the opponent's leading knee and taking his arm underneath to block the opponent from establishing any passing positions. He emphasizes the importance of creating space using the left foot pushing against the opponent's hip while maintaining the hooked grip with the other leg, eventually allowing for guard recovery. The video concludes with a warm-up drill to practice the technique, where the opponent alternates knee-to-mat attempts and the practitioner uses the Reverse De La Riva hook to counter each attempt.

Position: Reverse De La Riva Guard Category: Guard Retention

Improve your ‘Log Splitter’ closed guard opening. #bjj #jiujitsu #grappling #lachlangiles…

56s · Lachlan Giles

In this video, BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles introduces an improved technique for the 'Log Splitter' closed guard pass. He emphasizes the common mistake of putting the knee through the gaps of the opponent, which may lead to a disadvantageous position or injury. Instead, he demonstrates a step-by-step process which involves stepping back, attaching the knee to your own chest and then sitting back allowing the knee to post through effectively to open the opponent's guard. His method encourages forcing the opponent to adjust their guard position, ultimately aiding in the pass.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Take mount like Khabib (Lachlan Giles)

5m · Lachlan Giles

This video, taught by Lachlan Giles, focuses on transitioning from side control to the mounted position, emulating the style of Khabib Nurmagomedov. The video emphasizes the importance of maintaining control throughout the transition, particularly by ensuring the opponent’s legs remain pinned together and blocked by the hips and elbow. Giles also discusses how to navigate the opponent’s frames and finish the transition with a locked triangle above the knee. Overall, the video offers comprehensive practical instruction on smoothly moving from side control to mount.

Position: Side Control Category: Transitions

Sweeps from Reverse De La Riva (Lachlan Giles)

5m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles details the technique of executing a sweep from the Reverse De La Riva Guard. He explains the specific hand positioning required to control the opponent's wrist and armpit, along with footwork for creating separation and off-balancing the opponent. Giles also suggests a hidden sweep approach that forces the opponent to step forward, thus enabling an easier transition into the sweep. The video emphasizes the directional aspect of the sweeping kick to ensure success.

Position: Reverse De La Riva Guard Category: Sweeps

Heel hook from 50/50. Absolute MMA Shanghai (Lachlan Giles)

10m · Lachlan Giles

The video is an instructional hosted by Lachlan Giles at Absolute MMA Shanghai. Giles breaks down how to effectively execute a heel hook from the 50/50 position. He guides viewers to maintain a high hip positioning, details the importance of spinning to north-south for a smooth leg entry, and explains the nuances of securing a tight grip for a successful submission. Giles also shares tips on using a tilting move for lifting the opponent's heel off the ground and ways to prevent counterattacks.

Technique: Heel Hook Category: Submissions

Body lock pass (Lachlan Giles)

3m · Lachlan Giles

Instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrates his variation of the body lock pass from the butterfly guard position. He highlights important details such as retaining low hip positioning to prevent the opponent from transitioning to closed guard. Giles also emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's leg to prevent them from establishing a butterfly hook and ensuring proper positioning of the shoulder to keep the opponent flat on the mat during the pass.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Guard Passing

Defending the rugby pass using wrestling techniques

11m · Lachlan Giles

This video is an instructional lesson by Lachlan Giles on how to defend the rugby pass from half guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Lachlan teaches viewers to manage the opponent's shoulder to maintain control and avoid the potential pass. He shows viewers how to reach around and block the opponent's ability to upgrade grips. The video offers multiple scenarios of how one might end up in this situation, providing viewers with a comprehensive understanding of the technique.

Position: Half Guard Category: Survival/Defense

5 stretches to improve your guard (Lachlan Giles)

7m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles emphasizes the importance of flexibility for maintaining guard position. To his point, Giles provides detailed instruction on five specific stretches designed to improve guard retention and prevent opponents from passing. Targeting hip rotators, hamstring, and adductor muscles, these stretches aim to directly improve the movements and positions integral to guard, such as bringing the knee behind the shoulder and maintaining wide leg splits. Giles showcases real-life grappling examples for demonstrating the utility of each stretch as a preventive measure against guard passes.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

3 tips to improve your guard retention #shorts #bjj #lachlangiles #submeta #nogi #jiujit…

1m · Lachlan Giles

This video features BJJ instructor, Lachlan Giles giving helpful advice on how to improve your guard retention. The first tip he shares emphasizes on the importance of making a stiff arm frame as early as possible, which can then be replaced with your leg for recovery. Secondly, he suggests a self framing technique to prevent being turned away which helps in recovering the legs. Lastly, he advises to hook an armpit any time your opponent makes an angle. This acts as a frame, helping in recovery, distance creation, and protection against opponent's transitions to the north-south position.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Home BJJ training: Most important stretches (Lachlan Giles)

37m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrates a series of stretching exercises specifically designed for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioners. These stretches aim to improve flexibility, active range of motion, and overall athletic potential - attributes that play crucial roles in BJJ. Giles stresses that improving body movements can lead to a larger repertoire of BJJ techniques, thereby enhancing one's performance on the mat. He also encourages learners to make stretching a regular part of their BJJ training routine.

Position: Various Category: Drills

Straight ankle locks (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

The video features renowned BJJ black belt Lachlan Giles demonstrating the Straight Ankle Lock from a Single X position. He discusses common defenses his opponent might use and provides techniques to counteract each of them. Giles stresses the importance of proper grip and body placement for successful application of the ankle lock. He also highlights the use of the feet and body to control the opponent, maintain the correct position, and generate the necessary pressure for the submission.

Technique: Straight Ankle Lock Position: Single Leg X Guard Category: Leg Locks

Escape side control fundamentals part1: Prevention and frames escape

15m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles teaches how to prevent and escape side control using frames and underhooks. First, he explains the importance of positioning oneself as someone is establishing side control. The instructor demonstrates escaping by using frames with the underhook and getting up on one's knees. Finally, he stresses the significance of blocking the arm, explaining how to create space by shimming the shoulders and moving the hips. Lachlan also highlights the potential risk of injuries if the frames are not used correctly.

Position: Side Control Category: Escapes

How To Pass The BJJ Half Guard No Gi by Lachlan Giles

7m · Lachlan Giles

This video features Lachlan Giles demonstrating a No Gi Pass from the Half Guard position. He explains how to deal with a common challenge when dealing with an opponent using their shin to prevent guard passing. Giles starts the technique by pressuring his chest over his opponent's leg to uncross their feet, then he grabs the hip and starts working his pass. He uses his knee to open the opponent's foot to free his trapped leg and then uses hooks and pressure to secure the pass.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Ouch! 3 Most PAINFUL Submissions in BJJ

1m · Matt Arroyo

In this video, Matt Arroyo presents three of the most painful submissions in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He first demonstrates the 10-finger choke, which involves placing the opponent’s chin in the palm and directing the fingers into the junction between the neck and chin, clamping the elbows and applying pressure. Next, he shows the bicep slicer which is applied when the armbar fails. This involves triangling the opponent's arm and applying pressure to the forearm and bicep with the wrist bones. Although it's not likely to cause a break, it's still very painful.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

The First 10 Bjj Submissions You Should Learn

11m · Jedi Does Jiujitsu

In the video, ‘Jedi Does Jiujitsu’ shares the first 10 submissions beginners in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) should focus on learning. He provides detailed instructions on how to execute these submissions, including the armbar, Americana, Kimura, triangle, and D'Arce choke. The instructor emphasizes that these techniques are high-percentage moves that are relatively simple for beginners to pick up, and he explains how to perform each submission from different positions. The video is meant to be a comprehensive guide for beginners looking to improve their submission skills in BJJ.

Technique: Armbar Position: Various Category: Submissions

High Percentage Chokes: No Gi by Lachlan Giles

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional course by Lachlan Giles focusing on high-percentage chokes in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Giles, widely recognized as a top Australian grappler, explains how these specific chokes can be efficiently used to maximize success in both practice and competition situations. The material taught aims to enhance one's no-gi skills, specifically targeting effective choking techniques.

Position: Submission Category: Submissions

REAR NAKED CHOKE John Danaher

1m · John Danaher

This video features John Danaher explaining the correct technique to apply a Rear Naked Choke from a back mount position. He demonstrates how to work the thumb knuckle under the opponent's jaw, progressively increasing the pressure and securing the position of the forearm and wrist. He emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's neck and using the chin to secure the position further. Finally, he demonstrates the correct elbow and arm positioning for optimally applying the choke.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

Super useful REAR NAKED CHOKE detail 👊 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

18s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu presents a quick, instructional video on refining the technique of the Rear Naked Choke submission. While the conventional approach involves simply closing your elbow, a more effective method, as the instructor explains, is to rotate the elbow backward. This technique, while seemingly minor, amps up the power and efficiency of the choke by closing the space around the opponent's neck.

Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

The Triangle Machine by Craig Jones

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features BJJ star Craig Jones teaching his patented clamp system for executing a Triangle Choke, a submission move he has frequently used to dominate BJJ championships. Craig Jones rose to fame after his impressive performance in ADCC 2017 and EBI, where he used the Triangle Choke as one of his secret weapons. He introduces the Triangle Machine course, which focuses on mastering this specific technique to conquer the mat every time.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

A Sneaky Armbar that Everyone Should Know

35s · Matt Arroyo

This short video tutorial by Matt Arroyo presents a clever armbar submission from inside control. He demonstrates a unique grip, referred to as the "what time is it" grip, used to turn the opponent's head and raise their arm, setting up for the armbar. He then explains how to execute the move step by step, showing how to swivel the leg, secure the opponent's elbow, and finalize the submission with the armbar. His method focuses on surprise and speed, claiming that the opponent should already be tapping out by the time the position is secured.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

A sneaky Jiu Jitsu armbar that everyone should know!

1m · Matt Arroyo

This video is a Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) tutorial by Matt Arroyo. In it, he demonstrates an armbar submission technique from the open guard position, a move he attributes to Marcelo Garcia. The step-by-step demonstration shows how to successfully perform the armbar when an opponent attempts to gain an underhook, utilizing your opponent's momentum against them. If executed properly, the technique would lead to an efficient armbar, causing discomfort to the opponent, and possibly leading to submission.

Technique: Armbar Position: Open Guard Category: Submissions

Kimura: Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, introduces his system for the Kimura submission in this instructional video. He advertises this system as an effective and versatile choice both for Gi and No Gi Jiu Jitsu, and even for self-defense purposes. As the teacher of champions including Garry Tonon, Georges St Pierre, and Chris Weidman, Danaher's methods are praised for their efficiency. The Kimura system is said to enhance one's overall understanding and performance in Jiu Jitsu.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Never use a Body Triangle From Closed Guard

16s · JoshRichBJJ

In this video, instructor JoshRichBJJ demonstrates how to execute a calf slicer from a closed guard position. The instructor emphasizes the mistake of using a body triangle from closed guard. After his opponent employs this flawed technique, he capitalizes by bringing his leg up to trap his opponent's foot, ultimately submitting them with a calf slicer.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

One of my favorite ways to get to a triangle. #bjj #jiujitsu #gordonryan #jonjones

1m · Gordon Ryan

In this YouTube video, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) competitor Gordon Ryan presents an instructional video on how to set up a triangle choke from the guard position. He demonstrates this technique by taking control of his opponent's wrist and shoulder, which forces the opponent to move in a specific direction. Ryan then uses this movement to take his knee inside of his partner's shoulder and throw his foot over to establish the triangle choke. He emphasizes on the importance of controlling the angle and the opponent's leg to secure the submission.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

The Front Headlock System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features instruction from renowned coach John Danaher on his system for executing a front headlock. Highlighting its effectiveness in both Gi and No-Gi situations, and for self-defense, John explains the game-changing nature of this technique. The video also explains how the system has been used by UFC champs like Georges St Pierre and Chris Weidman, and grappling icons like Garry Tonon, Eddie Cummings, and Gordon Ryan. The front headlock system can revolutionize the BJJ game of any practitioner.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

How to do the darce choke!

58s · Matt Arroyo

This video, taught by instructor Matt Arroyo, is an instructional video on how to perform a darce choke. The submission is shown to be effective from the top half guard position when an opponent has an underhook. The key details demonstrated include arm positioning, head control, and application of pressure with both a lean and a squeeze. Securing the choke involves a specific sprawl and weight distribution for maximum efficacy.

Technique: Darce Choke Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

CRAIG JONES BREAKS DOWN NINJA CHOKE FROM UFC 296 #bteamjiujitsu

34s · Craig Jones

Craig Jones breaks down the execution of the Ninja Choke as applied in UFC 296. He explains how to trap the opponent's arm and use it to control their posture, highlighting the essential role of weight distribution in setting up the choke. He further demonstrates the technique on a training partner, emphasizing the importance of covering the opponent's head to prevent them from posturing out, and locking in the choke at the bicep to achieve a submission.

Position: Standing — Torso Control Category: Submissions

The Fastest Way: To Increase Your Submission Percentage (No Gi) by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features John Danaher, a legendary coach and instructor, teaching high-percentage techniques, back takes, and powerful submission strategies to increase your submission percentage in BJJ No Gi. The focus of the video is on the rear strangle, a king of submissions, and its variations. It also includes development of a diverse armdrag system from open guard that forces opponents to expose their back for high-percentage back takes. The video shows how to take the back from various positions like standing, half guard, open guard, closed guard, mount, side mount, and even from inferior positions.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

How To Do The Perfect Armbar by John Danaher

16m · John Danaher

John Danaher, highly respected BJJ coach and instructor, gives detailed guidance on how to perform the perfect armbar from the mount. Beginning with the basic positioning and factors necessary to engage the armbar, he lays out a precise approach to achieve the position, control the situation, and finally break the opponent's defense. He carefully explains the important concept of getting the opponent's elbow inside the line of your hips and provides strategies to achieve that against a resistant opponent. His method includes a precise hand-walking technique to make the armbar effective and able to be executed in various situations.

Technique: Armbar Position: Mount Category: Submissions

Buggy Choke - Fast Breakdown

27s · Keith from Knight Jiu-Jitsu

The video is a quick tutorial by Keith from Knight Jiu-Jitsu on how to apply the Buggy choke from the Side Control position. To initiate the choke, the bottom player pushes the top player's head down and weaves their own leg under his neck. By straightening his leg and connecting it to the other leg while gripping his arm, the choke is applied with significant pressure forcing the top player to tap.

Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Triangles Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, John Danaher – a well-known and highly sought-after grappling coach – offers comprehensive coverage on mastering triangle submissions. He refers to the Triangle as the most versatile submission technique in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He demonstrates various setups, chokes, and armlocks that could be deployed from either the top or bottom positions. The course aims to transform your overall game by integrating this skill into your moves.

Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

Kimura Tutorial

29s · Sideshow Jiu-Jitsu

The instructor demonstrates how to perform a Kimura submission in this video. Starting with both partners sitting, the technique involves grabbing your partner's wrist and elbow before leaning back to apply pressure. To complete the submission, you cross your legs and slowly force the top of their hand towards their neck.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

3 BJJ chokes from a standing position

54s · Coach Tim

Coach Tim from Independent MMA in Georgia demonstrates three different standing choke techniques suited for self-defense scenarios where going to the ground may be unfavorable. The first technique discussed is a standing guillotine choke when the opponent comes in close. The second technique is a side choke, which is usable when the opponent tries to grab the shoulder. The final technique is a rear naked choke, performed after a wrist grab and roll out.

Position: Standing Category: Submissions

Arm Bars: Enter The System by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional course by John Danaher on mastering arm bars in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The course, divided into 8 parts, delves into the intricacies of an arm bar and provides key insights on how to transform simple moves into powerful techniques. John's 'jujigatame system' espouses a two-step method to effectively execute an arm bar. He further details how, with a series of precisely detailed adjustments, any athlete can significantly increase their armbar success rate.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

How To Do The Perfect Triangle Choke Even If You Have Short Legs by John Danaher

13m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher, an acclaimed Jiu-Jitsu coach, teaches how to perform a perfect triangle choke, even for those with short legs. He emphasizes that the success of the triangle choke does not merely depend on leg length but also heavily on proper body positioning. He provides a detailed breakdown on the correct body positioning and provides instruction on how to lock in the triangle for a tight choke. The video serves as an informative guide for all skill levels, with or without shorter legs.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Great Kimura Sequence from Butterfly Guard by Gordon Ryan

1m · Gordon Ryan

The video features instructor Gordon Ryan explaining a Kimura sequence from the butterfly guard position. He shows how to let the opponent cross-face, then reach around and lock hands for the Kimura. He explains options they have based on the opponent's reaction, such as getting their hand behind their back or using it for positional gains. He mentions the possibility of transitioning to other attacks like armbar, triangle, or taking the back.

Technique: Kimura Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Submissions

The Straight Armlock Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, ADCC Medalist Lachlan Giles teaches the viewers how to execute a straight armlock from various positions. Emphasis is given to troubleshooting escapes and improving submission rate. The video aims to provide techniques for combining straight arm locks, armbars, and more to effectively finish submission holds in commonly encountered grappling situations such as side control, closed guard, back attacks, and open guard. Additionally, the video includes footage of Lachlan rolling with his students and giving a running commentary of his implementations of the techniques taught.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

3 simple closed guard submissions you need to know!#jiujitsu #jiujitsutips

49s · Matt Arroyo

This video is a quick tutorial by Matt Arroyo on executing three simple submissions from the closed guard position. He first demonstrates how to perform a Kimura when your opponent places his hands on the mat. If the opponent is too strong to move for the Kimura, Matt shows how to transition to a Guillotine choke. Lastly, he teaches how to execute an Armbar when the opponent is playing low.

Technique: Armbar Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

5 tips for a better ARM TRIANGLE 🔥🥋 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

58s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video is a tutorial by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu about the Arm Triangle submission in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). The instructor breaks down the technique into five critical tips to improve its effectiveness. The tips include ensuring a deep choke bite, practicing the technique with one arm, position oneself low, finding the open elbow, and crawling hands up the mat. These tips aim to optimize the mechanics of the submission and make it more efficient and successful in live situations.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Arm Triangle Category: Submissions

Kimura Hunting by Kazushi Sakuraba

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Japanese MMA legend, Kazushi Sakuraba teaches the art of setting up and executing the Kimura from any position. His unique grappling style includes techniques from BJJ, catch wrestling, aikido, and professional wrestling. He rose to fame as a phenomenal grappler with remarkable proficiency in submitting renowned Jiu Jitsu fighters and wrestlers in UFC and Pride. Through this instructional video, viewers can learn his approach that emphasises hunting for a finish and attacking from all angles.

Technique: Kimura Position: Various Category: Submissions

The no-gi EZEKIEL! 💥 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

26s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video is an instructional tutorial on performing a no-gi Ezekiel from the mount position. The instructor, Jordan, demonstrates the technique by emphasizing on getting a tight grip on the opponent's neck or bicep, getting the arm deeper around the neck, making a fist, and pressing it onto the opponent's carotid artery. The video is intended to provide an alternative submission when unable to isolate the opponent's arms for an arm bar or arm triangle from the mount.

Position: Mount Category: Submissions

The 3 best submissions to look for from side control! #jiujitsu

1m · Matt Arroyo

This video is focused on teaching three primary submission techniques from the side control - Americana, Straight Arm Lock, and Kimura. Instructor Matt Arroyo explains each submission technique and how they can transition into one another forming the "mouse trap system". The idea is that if one submission is unsuccessful due to the opponent's resistance or counter, it naturally converts into the next submission in the sequence. Overall, it is an instructional video aiming to improve a practitioner's submission game from the side control position.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

High Percentage Submissions by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Bernardo Faria, a 5X World Champion, teaching his High Percentage Submissions Course. The course aims to help students elevate their game with the strategies and sequences Faria used to secure submissions and win championships. As a result, learners can develop an arsenal of attacks from every position and become an adept submission hunter. The system is presented as easy to learn and can significantly enhance a student's game.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

Gordon Ryan on how women can beat men in BJJ #jiujitsu

1m · Gordon Ryan

In this YouTube video, the world-renowned No-Gi BJJ practitioner, Gordon Ryan, offers his advice on how women can compete against men in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Gordon emphasizes that the key is to focus on lower body submissions such as leg entanglements, as this prevents men from leveraging their upper body strength. He further explains that these techniques not only keep the opponent’s weight off but also limit their hand usage, thus allowing females to use both their arms and legs against the opponent's legs.

Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Submissions

How To Do The Perfect Kimura From Side Control by John Danaher

10m · John Danaher

John Danaher presents a detailed breakdown of how to execute a Kimura submission from Side Control. He explores the importance of differentiating between the pushing and pulling hand, emphasizing the need for a 'pull dominant' Kimura over a 'push dominant' one. He also introduces the concept of the 'power line', which involves orienting oneself along a diagonal axis to the opponent, from opposite hip to shoulder. This alignment generates extreme tension in the opponent's arm, leading to a highly effective submission.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Systematically attacking From Top Pins: Side Control & North South by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Gordon Ryan provides detailed instruction on how to effectively execute submissions such as Kimuras, triangles, and armbars from Side Control & North South positions. He explains the concept of isolating and submitting limbs and how to stop escape attempts, thereby ensuring constant control. The system he demonstrates is the one he uses in no-gi grappling, with guidance from his coach, John Danaher. He also breaks down live footage to clearly illustrate the application of the techniques in real-time combat scenarios.

Technique: Armbar Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Kimura tutorial - John Danaher #shorts #shortsvideo #shortsfeed

47s · John Danaher

This instructional video features John Danaher demonstrating a kimura submission from the closed guard position. Initially setting up what seems to be a triangle, he explains the importance of positioning, leg locking, and wrist exposure in order to effectively achieve the submission. By taking the opponent's elbow into the armpit and controlling the opponent's head, a bone-breaking submission can be achieved with only minimal movement. This variation of the kimura is one that Danaher strongly favors and recommends.

Technique: Kimura Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

My favorite BJJ move: The north south choke! #jiujitsu

1m · Matt Arroyo

This video features instructor Matt Arroyo demonstrating how to execute his favorite move, the North South Choke, in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He starts by showing the key hand placement, one around the opponent's neck and the second hand supporting underneath. He then explains that the level of weight exerted doesn't have to be 100%; a successful choke can be achieved with just 50-60% pressure, achieved by dropping the pectoral muscle, not the shoulder. Arroyo emphasizes the importance of not rushing the choke but keeping it steady and adding gradual pressure if needed.

Position: North South Category: Submissions

Lapel Chokes From Everywhere by Miko Hytonen

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video, instructed by Miko Hytonen, is an intensive guide on how to effectively apply lapel chokes from various positions including closed guard, half guard, mount, side control, turtle, the back, and more. Among others, it covers various chokes such as the Ezekiel choke, baseball choke, bow and arrow choke. The tutorial also teaches how to use these choke techniques to sweep or reverse the position. It guides on creating submission chains off of failed attempts, promoting constant positional awareness.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

One of my favorite details for the darce #bjj #jiujitsu #gordonryan #jonjones

1m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a well-known BJJ athlete, explains his preferred technique for applying the Darce choke. He emphasizes the importance of using one's ear to restrict the opponent's movement by pressing it onto their rear deltoid. This allows him to set his hands without having to rush, leading to a more secure choke. The effectiveness of the choke also relies on the proximity of the hand positioning to the opponent's shoulder blades.

Position: Darce Choke Category: Submissions

How To Perform The Perfect Rear Naked Choke by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

This video features instructor John Danaher giving a thorough tutorial on how to successfully apply a Rear Naked Choke, from the back control position. He explains the anatomical targets of the choke and the difference between choking and strangulation in BJJ context. He also elaborates on common mistakes made while applying the choke, like putting pressure on the wrong spot, and demonstrates a more efficient way of performing the technique for a faster and more effective result. In addition, he mentions the importance of control in successfully applying this choke.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

Shotgun Aoki Locks by Mateusz Szczecinski

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, instructor Mateusz Szczecinski demonstrates the application of the Shotgun Aoki Locks in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu from butterfly ashi and knee reap positions. He explains his grip and submission technique and demonstrates how to transition from belly-up to belly-down positions. Mateusz also includes tips on how to utilize the matrix position for X hooks and back takes. Furthermore, the video offers advice on playing off your back for leg locks using K guard, X guard, reverse De La Riva, among others.

Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Submissions

Mikey Musumeci explains how Khamzat Chimaev could have finished Dricus Du Plessis

50s · Mikey Musumeci

In his analysis, Musumeci details how Khamzat Chimaev could have secured a triangle choke submission in his UFC 319 title fight against Dricus Du Plessis. He places emphasis on wedging the knee under the opponent's shoulder and securing an overback grip on the neck and the opponent's armpit. He then explains the movement of transitioning the knee over and locking in the triangle choke, creating a tight and perilous situation for the opponent.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Triangle Choke Category: Submissions

Lock Up Anaconda Chokes EASIER 🥋 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

14s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video instructs on a common mistake and the correct way to perform an Anaconda Choke from a Front Headlock position. The instructor highlights that many practitioners make the mistake of locking the choke first before rolling their opponent, making it hard to roll them. Instead, one should use a Gable grip, pull the opponent's arm in, then roll, lock it up, and finish the choke.

Technique: Anaconda Choke Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

Systematically Attacking The Back by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features ADCC double gold champ, Gordon Ryan, sharing his signature back attack system consisting of strangles, armlocks, triangles and combinations. Gordon explains and demonstrates these techniques, detailing how he and his coach, Professor John Danaher, have developed them. These methods have been instrumental in his success, including achieving multiple submission wins as a black belt. The video also includes real-time gym breakdowns of Gordon's proven submission game.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

Ryan Hall The Triangle - Closed Guard: Hip Bump Triangle

8m · Ryan Hall

The video features well-known BJJ practitioner, Ryan Hall, demonstrating a submission technique known as the Hip Bump Triangle from the closed guard position. He emphasizes the importance of disrupting an opponent's balance before initiating the technique, by forcing them to either fall or post their hand. The technique also entails pulling the wrist forward, forcing the opponent to instinctively pull back, subsequently creating an opening to execute the submission. The instructor underscores the need for attaching to the opponent and completing the lock in mid-air, as falling back could create space for the opponent to escape.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

3 Submissions Every BJJ Black Belt Should Know by Craig Jones, Bernardo Faria & John Dana…

13m · Craig Jones

This video is guided by renowned instructors Craig Jones, Bernardo Faria, and John Danaher, presenting three key submission techniques that they believe every BJJ black belt should know. Initiating with a straight foot lock demonstrated by Craig Jones, the video then progresses onto a choke and an armbar. Bernardo Faria explains a choke setup from side control, focusing on the differential of applying pressure and opening the opponent's defenses. Finally, John Danaher follows up with the presentation of an efficient armbars application.

Technique: Armbar Position: Various Category: Submissions

Kimura Domination by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features instructor Tom DeBlass teaching viewers his mastery technique of Kimura Domination. DeBlass demonstrates how to transform a BJJ game by mastering various attacks and tricky transitions to submit opponents with the Kimura technique. He shows how to use a Kimura grip to attack and break through all types of defense tactics. He also shares how to dominate using the Kimura, deploy it for sweeps and use it as a shortcut to leg attacks.

Technique: Kimura Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Proper Mechanics for a clean Guillotine Choke

47s · Wim Deputter

In this YouTube video, Wim Deputter breaks down the mechanics of properly applying a guillotine choke in brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He suggests treating the guillotine as a rear-naked choke where you make sure your opponent's throat is inside your elbow pit, making it harder for them to use their arms to escape. Elbow positioning around the throat and having control over both sides of your opponent's neck are important to execute a tight choke. He emphasises that this technique is about understanding the mechanics, not strength.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Guillotine Choke Category: Submissions

Gracie Breakdown - Triangle Choke from the Mount

8m · Ryron Gracie

Ryron and Rener Gracie demonstrate and discuss their favorite variations of the Triangle Choke from the Mount position in this instructional video from Gracie University. They share two main techniques, one referred to as the 'modified mount' and the other as the 'direct flight'. Each technique relies on effective control of the opponent's arms, crucial hip placement, and the use of leg pressure to secure the choke. Differences in setup and execution lead to a playful debate about efficiency between the two brothers.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Mount Category: Submissions

Wrist Lock The World by Pete Letsos

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Pete Letsos, a skilled practitioner often referred to as "The Greek," presents over 40 different wrist lock techniques useful in submission grappling. Pete marks the wrist lock as a often overlooked attack, arguing for its effectiveness by emphasizing its vulnerability and availability. He demonstrates how to execute the submission from various positions and angles, and unravels the subtler aspects of the wrist lock submission.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

Triangle from Turtle - Gyaku Sankaku Jime

37s · Knight Jiu-Jitsu

The video, presented by Knight Jiu-Jitsu, features a detailed demonstration of the setup and execution of a Gyaku Sankaku Jime, a technique popularly known as Triangle Choke from the Turtle position. The instructor first walks viewers through the basics of establishing a controlling position via a "power half" to create separation. He then instructively guides the audience through a series of steps to secure the chokehold, explaining additional strategies like the 'Shotgun Style Arm Bar Stretch' for ensuring a submission if the opponent is resistant to the choke.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Turtle Category: Submissions

Rear Naked Strangle by JOHN DANAHER #shorts #shortsvideo

56s · John Danaher

This video tutorial demonstrates the Rear Naked Strangle technique, taught by instructor John Danaher. The instructor emphasizes the importance of connecting both to the opponent's lower body with legs and to the upper body with arms in order to successfully execute the move. Danaher provides step-by-step instructions including how to place the strangle arm, where to place hands, and how to finalize the strangle. It is an effective and popular submission technique in BJJ.

Technique: Rear Naked Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

Enter The System Bundle by John Danaher

$999.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The bundle includes six modules addressing different systems of submissions. The leg lock system which revolutionized no-gi grappling, the back system for more precise rear strangles, the kimura system for better submissions and positioning, the juji gatame armbar system for precision and control, the guillotine choke system from front headlocks, and the triangle choke system with adjustments for shorter legs are all covered in depth. These systems have all been instrumental in the success of Danaher's students.

Technique: Armbar Position: Various Category: Submissions

New BJJ Triangle Choke Set Up On The Mount by Craig Jones

7m · Craig Jones

This video features renowned BJJ instructor Craig Jones demonstrating a new setup for executing a triangle choke from the mount position. The technique relies on the practitioner posting a hand to the floor, using their fist to apply pressure to the opponent's neck and under their armpit to compromise their base, before transitioning into the triangle choke setup. This set up takes precautions to prevent space for the opponent to counter, immediately securing the ankle to prevent hand retraction. The video emphasizes that this setup does not risk losing the top position even if an opponent tries to clear it.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Mount Category: Submissions

How to Do an Americana from Side Control | MMA Submissions

1m · Not Mapped

In this instructional video, the instructor demonstrates how to execute an Americana submission from a side control position. Elephant emphasis is placed on the proper grip and arm alignment to ensure a successful technique. A three-step process—dubbed the accordion, motorcycle, and down—is introduced, detailing how to pull the opponent's arm in, twist the wrists, and pull the elbow down to the feet. Additionally, the instructor underscores the importance of maintaining parallel alignment between the executing arm and the opponent's arm.

Technique: Americana Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Anti Jiu Jitsu by Kazushi Sakuraba

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Kazushi Sakuraba, a renowned Japanese MMA legend, offers a unique blend of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ), catch wrestling, aikido and pro wrestling in his instructional video. The main focus of the tutorial is on joint locks executed from diverse angles, and honing an entire submission game that Sakuraba himself invented and refined. The approaches in the video are designed to continuously hunt for the finish and attack from every direction. Sakuraba places emphasis on intricate details that make his techniques unique and effective.

Position: Various Category: Submissions

Easy BJJ Omoplata setup

10s · Not Mapped

The video is a short instructional tutorial explaining how to setup an Omoplata submission from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor demonstrates the steps, starting with establishing grips, controlling the opponent's posture, and then using footwork on the hip to stretch the opponent out. The exact technique name or further steps aren't detailed due to the video's short duration.

Technique: Omoplata Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

ROLLING TRIANGLE from the CLAMP John Danaher

45s · John Danaher

John Danaher demonstrates how to execute a rolling triangle from the clamp position. He begins by demonstrating how to get the inside position and transition into the clamp position, using your foot to disrupt your opponent's posture. As the opponent's head lowers, one should raise their own head and proceed to rotate and point the knees towards the ground. As the instructor kicks through, a superb attacking position is achieved, which enables the execution of the rolling triangle.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Clamp Category: Submissions

Unifying The Systems: Navigating Between The DDS Submissions Systems by Garry Tonon

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video, titled "Unifying The Systems: Navigating Between The DDS Submissions Systems," features Garry Tonon, a renowned no-gi grappling champion, undefeated MMA fighter, and a member of the Danaher Death Squad, as the instructor. Tonon provides in-depth insights into the DDS submission systems, focusing on transitioning smoothly between different signature submissions like leg locks, back attacks, kimura locks, triangles, and armbars. The video follows a step-by-step instructional format, teaching viewers how to use one attack to set up and lock in another, and how to find the back or finish the fight using Tonon's favorite transitions.

Position: Submission Category: Submissions

North - South Choke

1m · Not Mapped

This video provides a tutorial on how to effectively execute a North-South choke in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The key points to secure this choke involve a setup from a cross face, directing the opponent's chin away from the aggressor's body, and ensuring clearance of both of the opponent's arms. The instructor emphasizes the importance of keeping head pressure tight, sinking the hips, and driving forward with the toes to secure the submission. The video concludes by promising to reveal the sixth fastest choke in a subsequent video.

Position: North South Category: Submissions

How To Perfect Your North South Choke by Marcelo Garcia

20m · Marcelo Garcia

Marcelo Garcia, known for his impressive submissions, demonstrates how to execute a North South Choke. He discusses the importance of controlling the opponent and emphasizes that their neck is always exposed, regardless of how they might try to protect it. He delves into the details of wrapping the arm around the neck, aligning oneself with the opponent, and applying pressure using the shoulder. Garcia stresses the importance of being patient and staying in position, rather than rushing to make the opponent tap.

Position: North South Category: Submissions

Systematically Attacking From Closed Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video teaches learners about Gordon Ryan's system for sweeping and submitting opponents from the closed guard position. Developed with John Danaher, the system is designed to be effective regardless of age or skill level. With emphasis on these fundamentals, learners can elevate their closed guard game and improve their overall performance in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Sweep-to-Submission Position: Closed Guard Category: Submissions

WRIST CONTROL TO TRIANGLES - JOHN DANAHER

1m · John Danaher

In the video, instructor John Danaher explains the step-by-step process of executing the Wrist Control to Triangles submission from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He demonstrates how to control the opponent's wrist and efficiently transition to a triangle choke. He emphasizes the importance of the collar tie and how to wedge around your opponent's head and shoulders to lock in the figure four, creating an incapacitating strangulation.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Sneaky wrist lock when someone’s trying to pass your guard ⚔️

45s · Matt Arroyo

In the video, jiu-jitsu instructor Matt Arroyo explains a sneaky submission technique: a wrist lock from the open guard position. When the opponent is on their knees, attempting to pass the guard with double underhooks, Matt demonstrates how to exploit the opponent's bent wrist, which is vulnerable as they grab the legs. Matt grabs the opponent's elbow and applies pressure to execute the lock. This submission often causes the opponent to tap out or rip their hand out, disrupting their guard passing attempt.

Position: Open Guard Category: Submissions

Strangles & Turtle Breakdowns: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video, created by the renowned BJJ coach, John Danaher, is a deep-dive into the performance of effective gi strangles and turtle breakdown techniques. A 3x3 approach is adopted for gi strangles - sliding collar strangles, cross collar strangles, and Ezekiel strangles. The video also comprehensively covers the strategic breakdown of a turtle position to assume a dominant stance. Importantly, these teachings are aimed at helping practitioners across all skill levels advance their BJJ competency more swiftly.

Position: Turtle Category: Submissions

Choking Mechanics You WON'T Learn In Class... D'arce, Anaconda & Arm-In Guillotine Comple…

17m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video is a detailed instructional by "Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu" about the D'arce Choke, Anaconda Choke, and Arm-In Guillotine submissions from the Front Headlock position. The instructor emphasizes that these submissions form a network through a strategy he calls the "front headlock choke system," allowing for switches and adaptations based on personal preference and opponent reactions. The instructor dedicates much of the video to explaining the importance of precise choking mechanics, including proper choke bites, elbow positioning, and rotational pressure. The video concludes with entries into the front headlock.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

3 BJJ Chokes That Everybody Should Know by Lachlan Giles (Amazing Details)

15m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles demonstrates three essential BJJ chokes. Each technique is being described with relevant details to maximize its effectiveness. Giles begins with the Rear Naked Choke, covering the importance of falling to the underhook side and securing the head with your arm and counter-pressure from your head, among other key pointers. He then proceeds to Guillotine and Arm Triangle chokes, explaining their specific details to ensure a successful submission. Giles emphasizes the practicality and high-percentage success rate of these chokes in competitive BJJ.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Back Control Category: Submissions

Systematic Submission Dilemmas: High Level Triangle and Leg Lock Combos by Craig Jones

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Craig Jones, one of the top no-gi grapplers globally, offers an in-depth explanation of his lethal submission system. The video emphasizes combining triangle chokes and leg locks. Jones details various techniques that allow for the best control and potency from different positions. The video also includes live-rolling footage wherein Jones provides step-by-step analysis of the presented concepts.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Leg Entanglement Category: Submissions

The High Elbow Guillotine by John Danaher

12m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher explains the intricacies of a High Elbow Guillotine starting from a Front Headlock position. He outlines the main problems that students encounter when attempting this move, including issues of shoulder and elbow placement. He emphasizes the importance of keeping the head forward, pushing the strangle-side shoulder forward while keeping the elbow back to maintain space and avoid countermeasures by the opponent. He then demonstrates the technique step by step, highlighting the importance of placing the support hand between the opponent's shoulder and neck.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Front Headlock Category: Submissions

Important details behind Islam Makhachev’s D’arce Choke by Craig Jones for Tom Aspinall.

26s · Craig Jones

In this video, Craig Jones breaks down the important aspects of executing a successful D'arce Choke, demonstrating it from a specific position. He explained the proper setup and positioning of hands and elbows. The video also emphasizes the technique of tightening the choke as one pulls the opponent in for the submission. This explanation is inspired by Islam Makhachev's D'arce Choke technique.

Position: Darce Choke Category: Submissions

Fundamental Armbar Mechanics by Karel "Silver Fox" Pravec

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video provides instruction on the fundamentals of the armbar in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu (BJJ), taught by Karel "Silver Fox" Pravec. It covers the offensive and defensive aspects of the technique and its employment in varying applications. Pravec, a respected figure with three decades of BJJ experience, provides insight into the mechanics of armbars from several positions. His instructions include high-level details meant to improve a practitioner's armbar game.

Technique: Armbar Position: Armbar Category: Submissions

FINISH THE HEAD & ARM CHOKE EVERYTIME! #bjj #grappling

46s · Keenan Cornelius

The video by Keenan Cornelius teaches how to successfully finish a head & arm choke from mount position. He demonstrates how to get the partner's elbow above the head to allow the underhook arm to cup around the partner's head. He further explains how to press the bicep against the partner's neck, go wrist to wrist, and move to side control for finishing the choke.

Position: Mount Category: Submissions

Kimura attack from side control with the option to arm bar - Andre Galvao

21m · Andre Galvao

This YouTube video features Andre Galvao demonstrating how to apply a kimura from side control with an armbar as a secondary option. He emphasizes the importance of proper weight distribution and maintaining a balance between creating pressure on your opponent without over committing. This involves using the toes for leverage, hugging the head of your opponent and applying pressure onto their body. Galvao also outlines how to navigate through defensive moves from the opponent.

Technique: Armbar Position: Side Control Category: Submissions

Off With Their Head: The Arm Triangle by Neil Melanson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the video, Neil Melanson, a master in catch wrestling, educates the viewer on the technique of the Arm Triangle, typically used in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu and Mixed Martial Arts. He shares a variety of techniques and adaptations that can enhance efficiency and leverage when performing the move. Instead of brute strength, Melanson emphasizes the importance of correct positioning and finesse. The instruction also includes setting traps for the opponent, using dominant body position, and applying crushing pressure.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Arm Triangle Category: Submissions

DANAHER DEATH SQUEEZE: My favorite mount attack

59s · Johnny Jitsu

The instructor presents a variation of a submission attack from the mount position, named the 'Danaher Death Squeeze.' This move includes a cross grip, elbow tuck, mask for American, switch to head control and then an arm trap to get a cross face. Once the grip is tight, a squeeze is applied which results in the submission. The move is compared to the 'Mother's Milk' from catch wrestling, but unlike it, this variation includes trapping the arm. The final part of the move involves advancing to a high mount position, applying a squeeze and rocking forward until the opponent taps out.

Position: Mount Category: Submissions

The PERFECT Darce Choke with Ruotolo Brothers

7m · Ruotolo Brothers

This video is an instructional BJJ video presented by the Ruotolo Brothers. The video demonstrates a detailed explanation on how to execute the perfect Darce Choke from the bottom guard position. The detailed instructions included teaching viewers how to maintain a proper guard, use their opponent's pressure against them for setup, control the opponent's wrist, sit up and drag the opponent's arm down to initiate the choke. The video also provided tips on how to increase the effectiveness of the Darce choke, how to create both pain and choking sensation and how to avoid common mistakes made while executing this move.

Technique: Darce Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

The Headhunter Guillotine Series by Neil Melanson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Neil Melanson, the high-level BJJ and MMA coach renowned for his detailed and brutal grappling style, teaches the viewers the Headhunter Guillotine System. He shares his extensive knowledge on setting up guillotine chokes, ways to effectively finish them, and other unorthodox concepts and techniques that are part of his system. Through this video, the viewers will be able to add a powerful submission tool to their arsenal, making their opponents in both gym spars and tournaments less likely to succeed against them.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Guillotine Choke Category: Submissions

Tricks from starting on the knees! The humbler!

52s · Matt Arroyo

The video is an instructional lesson by Matt Arroyo on how-to execute a transition technique called "The Humbler" from starting on the knees. Arroyo begins by positioning his foot near the opponent's knee to block knee movement and destabilize them. He then transitions into a knee-on-belly, steps over the opponent, pulls them on top, and goes for an armbar submission. This technique is clever as it enables one to control and submit an opponent within the first moments of rolling, potentially undermining the opponent's confidence.

Position: Knees Category: Transitions

Moves You Should Have Learned As Jiu Jitsu White Belt!

33s · Malachy Friedman

This video is a BJJ tutorial by instructor Malachy Friedman detailing the transition into the Mount position. He offers techniques to prevent common mistakes made when trying to transition from kneon belly position. The key element he introduces is the "reverse casing atomic" method, where the practitioner's weight is controlled to prevent easy turnovers. The technique involves sitting on the hip, controlling the opponent's arm, then throwing one's leg over the top to secure the mount position.

Position: Mount Category: Transitions

The B Team Bottom Game: Imparting Wrestling, Turtling, and Heisting For Superior Results…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Craig Jones, an ADCC Medalist, teaches the B-Team Bottom Game, a new grappling style that combines wrestling, turtling, and heisting. He introduces different positions such as stand-ups, 4-point positions, turtle positions, reverse Z guard, and the false half guard. The instructional video encourages forcing opponents into this new style of grappling, offering the use of attacks, throws, submissions, reversals, leg locks, back takes and more. This educational content is delivered across 6 volumes.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Bottom Position Category: Transitions

Oliveira's Brilliant Jiu Jitsu 🥋 | Technique Breakdown #ufc #breakdown

1m · Not Mapped

The video provides a detailed breakdown of Charles Olivera's brilliant foot sweep technique and closed guard transitions. It explains how Olivera uses pulling and blocking to attempt a sweep, and how he manages the closed guard position to maintain distance and control. The video particularly focuses on the technical standup technique executed by Olivera to move from ground to standing position. This standup allows him to have a strong base and wrestle up effectively.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

ARM DRAG TO BACK TAKE - GORDON RYAN

1m · Gordon Ryan

This YouTube video features BJJ black belt Gordon Ryan demonstrating the "Arm Drag to Back Take" technique. After obtaining a high armpit grip on the partner's arm, Gordon elevates his elbow and pushes his partner's arm underneath it. Then, he simultaneously pulls across the hands and over the right shoulder to position his partner's arm across the center line, achieving a tight grip. Subsequently, with a pendulum action of his left leg, he tucks in the right elbow while hanging off his partner's body, gaining control over his partner's posture and successfully taking their back. He emphasizes the importance of maintaining a high grip on the armpit for better control and grip retention.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

The Anti-Wrestling Equation by Craig Jones

$98.50 • BJJ Fanatics

This instruction video features accomplished grappler Craig Jones teaching his anti-wrestling system for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The focus is on front headlocks, exploiting takedown weaknesses, and commanding a range of top-level submissions. The techniques taught not only detail how to escape front headlocks from various positions but also how to transition into submissions such as anaconda, peruvian necktie, and darce, among others. Craig's system also includes strategies to attack the back effectively.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Front Headlock Category: Transitions

BJJ Techniques: Arm Drag to Back Take by Gordon Ryan

5m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan, a renowned BJJ grappler, presents an instructional video on the technique of transitioning from a Closed Guard position to a Back Take using an Arm Drag. Highlighting the importance of gripping, he demonstrates multiple scenarios where an arm drag could be employed and elaborates the process of performing it. Ryan emphasizes the need for an excellent grip, precise movements, and maintaining offensive control from the very beginning to ensure success. He discusses the significance of putting weight on the partner's arm and turning the chest downwards to maintain control and thwart the opponent's attempts to regain posture.

Technique: Back Take Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

Easiest Back Take In Jiu Jitsu

11s · Tyler Spangler

The video is an instructional piece by Tyler Spangler teaching viewers the easiest way to transition to the back take position in Jiu-Jitsu. He instructs to place one arm on the back of the opponent's neck and the other under their arm, using a gable grip to control pressure. This is followed by falling over their shoulder while throwing the second hook for control.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

Cradle of Filth by Neil Melanson

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video showcases Neil Melanson teaching the application of wrestling cradles within Jiu-Jitsu and Mixed Martial Arts (MMA). He introduces a technique named “The Bunch” to transition between nearside and farside cradles, effectively racking up more options for the practitioner. Melanson underlines how the cradle can be used to suppress the guard, thereby setting up passes and securing submissions. The instructional video thus offers a unique wrestling-grappling crossover strategy for enhanced dominance in combat sports.

Position: Pin Category: Transitions

Deep Lasso Invert Omoplata to Matrix

23s · Jon Thomas

In this instructional video, Jon Thomas demonstrates a sequence transitioning from a Deep Lasso position to an Invert Omoplata, and finally to a Matrix. He emphasizes the need to clear the near-side leg after securing a deep lasso when the opponent is low. Jon also provides a solution for the potential issue of the opponent posturing out of the Omoplata. This involves quickly grabbing the hip to come around and execute the Matrix, thus profiling both an old-school and a modern attack.

Technique: Omoplata Position: Lasso Guard Category: Transitions

23 BJJ Transitions, Scrambles, and Counters in Less Than 8 Min - Jason Scully

8m · Jason Scully

This video, by Jason Scully, is a high-paced instructional on numerous Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) transitions, counters, and scrambles. It illustrates how to maintain top position during hip bump sweep, how to recover guard when caught in a turtle position, a grip break to attack the back, and a counter to a kimura attempt. The video highlights that drilling each technique repeatedly is crucial for execution, while also demonstrating moves from different angles to enhance viewer understanding.

Position: Various Category: Transitions

Tactical Turtle by Neil Melanson

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is an instructional video by Neil Melanson, renowned grappling coach experienced in Brazilian jiu-jitsu, catch wrestling, MMA ground game, and other grappling disciplines. The focus is on the "Tactical Turtle" technique, which transforms a defensive turtle position into an offensive one. Melanson instructs viewers on how to effectively use the turtle position for safety while also teaching transitions into dominant positions, which include wrestling reversals such as ankle picks, single legs, rolls, and peek outs. Submissions, including Neil's devastating double wrist lock kimura series, are also part of the instruction.

Position: Turtle Category: Transitions

Can't pass the guard? 🤔 Go for the ROLLING FRONT HEADLOCK! 🙂 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiu…

17s · Jordan

This instructional video by Jordan teaches transitions from the guard position using a technique known as the Rolling Front Headlock. The instructor explains that when having trouble passing the guard, one effective strategy can be to roll through, catch the opponent's chin, and hook their arm simultaneously. From this position, it's possible to transition to the guillotine or begin attacking Anaconda or DARS.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Transitions

BJJ Technique - Octopus Half Guard Attacks - Coach Zahabi

12m · Firas Zahabi

The video provides instruction on how to execute attacks from the 'Octopus Half Guard' position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Coach Zahabi explains and demonstrates techniques such as the hip bump sweep and taking the back from the Octopus Half Guard when the opponent tries to pass or counter. Moreover, he highlights the importance of going "negative," or facing the same direction as your opponent, in response to the opponent attempting to pass in the negative direction. Lastly, he points out the effectiveness and simple nature of these techniques, asserting them as the only three needed from this position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Truck The World by Geo Martinez

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features Geo Martinez, an elite black belt competitor from 10th Planet, explaining how to execute a Back Take from the Truck Position - a signature 10th Planet grappling attack. He outlines how these techniques can be applied for various positions including the top and bottom, and illustrates control strategies alongside submission threats for a comprehensive back take style. The video emphasizes that no particular flexibility or speed is required for these techniques, making them accessible for a wider audience. Martinez also demonstrates potential finishing moves like calf slicers and twister locks.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

This is Why Danaher's Students Control EVERYONE in No-Gi

15m · John Danaher

In the video, premier Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructor John Danaher introduces the Shoulder Crunch System, a No-Gi control system he developed. He explains how this system allows a practitioner to maintain control over the opponent's posture from the guard position, countering the common issue of loss of control experienced when transitioning from Gi to No-Gi combat. The system revolves around a particular variation of Sumi Gaeshi, a sweeping technique John's students, including Gordon Ryan, have successfully used in high-level competition. He demonstrates key concepts like the "Locked Hands" principle, exploring how to manage opponent's reactions and leverage them into sweeps, upper body submissions, and leg lock entries.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Open Guard Category: Transitions

Craig Jones: Power Ride Retrospective - Wrestling Controls for BJJ

24m · Craig Jones

The video is a detailed overview of Craig Jones' grappling technique known as Power Ride. The video discusses how Jones conceptualized and developed the Power Ride strategy, its evolution and how it can be adapted into current BJJ systems. It differentiates between points and control in Jiu-Jitsu, arguing that the ability to restrict the opponent's movement and generate power is the true determinant of control. The video also discusses the historical context and origins of the original back position in BJJ and how the Power Ride technique enables a practitioner to maintain control over their opponent.

Position: Top Control Category: Transitions

Master The Move: Arm Drags by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, John Danaher, a renowned BJJ coach, provides a comprehensive guide on how to execute Arm Drags from the Half Butterfly position. The technique is presented from various angles, along with its application and execution. It covers how to perform Arm Drags from different positions such as supine, seated, standing, and how to use it defensively. It's an in-depth course designed for those looking to enhance their grappling game.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Destroy your opponent’s confidence in Jiu Jitsu with the turtle attack!

44s · Malachy Friedman

The video tutorial is presented by Malachy Friedman who teaches how to transition from a turtle position to the back using a turtle attack strategy. He starts by reaching under the opponent's gi with his far arm and grabs it, then walks around to the other side while also opening the opponent's knee. He places his head inside facing upwards and rolls to his back, flipping the opponent over him. After maintaining grip on the collar and knee to prevent escape, he then throws his leg over and slides up to take the back, releasing his grip once he gets there.

Technique: Back Take Position: Turtle Category: Transitions

4 X-GUARD ENTRIES that you need to know! 💥 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

47s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This YouTube video by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu offers instruction on 4 different entries into the X-Guard position. The entries are demonstrated from various guard positions and scenarios including when the opponent steps close to your head, from half guard butterfly, from a failed butterfly sweep, and from butterfly guard with double underhooks. These techniques employ the use of underhooks and butterfly hooks to successfully transition into the X-Guard. The instructor emphasizes the importance of getting underneath the opponent’s hips for each entry.

Position: X Guard Category: Transitions

Shoot To Kill: Wrestle, Scramble, Submit by Garry Tonon

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Garry Tonon, a Dynamic Grappler, ADCC Medalist, 5-time EBI Champion, and a founding athlete in the Danaher Death Squad. He teaches a mix of advanced techniques and transitions such as takedowns, back takes, ashi garami, front headlocks, and more to develop a dynamic, fight-ending style. The instruction focuses on finishing takedowns and scrambles in positions able to end the fight effectively. It is a comprehensive source to hone grappling skills to enhance fight potential.

Technique: Back Take Category: Transitions

Getting Out of Turtle Postion | Jiu-Jitsu Transitions

10m · Eli Knight

The video, by instructor Eli Knight, teaches multiple techniques to transition out of the turtle position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The turtle position is integral to the sport, providing substantial defense mechanisms. Eli Knight first explains the turtle position's defensive posture and then demonstrates techniques such as the "Sit Out" and "Reverse", which help one to transition out of this position safely. The instructor also provides advice on how to maneuver depending on your opponent's specific grips and movements.

Position: Turtle Category: Transitions

The Difference Between The BJJ Berimbolo With Gi And No Gi by Gordon Ryan

10m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan shows and explains the difference between performing the Berimbolo technique with a Gi and No-Gi in this instructional video. He demonstrates that when performing a Berimbolo in Gi, it's easy to create upper back exposure due to the availability of grips on the fabric. However, without a Gi, creating upper back exposure can be challenging because there aren't as many grip options. Ryan further demonstrates that without the Gi, you're left primarily with the choice of sweeping your opponent or going for leg attacks. He concludes the tutorial by demonstrating a transition from the Berimbolo into a leg attack.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Berimbolo Category: Transitions

The Berimbolo System Part 1: The Foundation by Mikey Musumeci

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video on the Berimbolo system is delivered by Mikey Musumeci, a 3-time Black Belt World Champion. He provides an 8-volume mega-series and starts with the foundation, dispelling myths around the need for super flexibility. He explains moves, counters, and combos that are paramount to effectively executing a Berimbolo. Key positions like the double guard pull, the stack berimbolo, and the twister hook are thoroughly explained.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Guard Generic Category: Transitions

Linking attacks from Single leg X guard (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

Lachlan Giles instructs on how to link attacks from Single Leg X Guard position in BJJ. He starts by explaining the importance of the control position, with your outside foot on the opponent's hip and your knee touching your heel. He presents three different sweep options depending on your opponent's responses. Firstly, if you can reach the far leg, you can square up and sweep your opponent directly back. Secondly, if the far leg is out of reach, you can apply a twisting motion while keeping your legs tightly around theirs to off-balance and sweep them. Lastly, if the opponent drops their knee to the mat, you can loop under their leg to off-balance them and come up on top.

Position: Single Leg X Guard Category: Transitions

Spladle from top position #grappling #wrestling #ufc #mma #jiujitsu #bjj #nogi #spladle #…

37s · Brett Houghton

In the video, Coach Brett Houghton explains how to transition to the spladle technique from the top position. He describes the process in detail with each step, starting from securing a position under the opponent's arms to getting the pin by sliding down the back. He emphasizes the importance of driving the leg into the opponent and dropping to the knee or hip while attacking the heel. It concludes with the instructor demonstrating the roll through and reminding viewers of the importance of the heel post and hip engagement.

Position: Top Control Category: Transitions

The Switch: Wrestling Applied to BJJ by Dinu Bucalet

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video by Dinu Bucalet focuses on applying a wrestling switch in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). The instructor provides multiple drill examples using the switch technique, starting from a body lock, a double leg, and a single leg, including counters to single leg attacks. The transition to various submissions such as omoplata, triangle, and crucifix is also explained. Additionally, he offers tutorials on positional control, specifically front headlock maintenance, crab ride defense and back takes from seated guard.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Front Headlock Category: Transitions

Z Guard to Williams Guard to Triangle Sequence (Lachlan Giles)

12m · Lachlan Giles

This video is an instructional content by Lachlan Giles wherein he teaches a complex transition between three positions: Z Guard, Williams Guard, and finalizing it with a Triangle submission. He begins by demonstrating the initial position, the Z Guard, before showing how to transition to the Williams Guard. From the Williams Guard position, he then shows how to execute a Triangle submission. Lachlan emphasizes on the necessity of flexibility in these movements, and the video offers clear, step-by-step instructions to precisely execute the whole sequence.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Z Guard Category: Transitions

John Danaher on one of the most important moves in BJJ #bjj #johndanaher #kingsway

1m · John Danaher

This video is a short tutorial on the armbar technique, presented by John Danaher. He emphasizes the effectiveness of the move, stating that there's no other move that can change the tide of a match so quickly, with less effort and risk. However, it's essential to execute the armbar properly to make it a significant threat to the opponent. Considering this, he argues the armbar is one of the most important moves in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Armbar Category: Transitions

Flow: The Top Game by Roberto "Cyborg" Abreu

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Robertson "Cyborg" Abreu teaches viewers about movement in Jiu Jitsu, specifically from the top position. He emphasizes focusing on overall movement rather than on specific techniques. He explains how this strategy can allow a person of any size to move quickly and effortlessly during a match. This instructional video is aimed at enhancing one's competition skills by incorporating these transitioning techniques.

Position: Top Control Category: Transitions

Octopus To Front Head by Craig Jones

34s · Craig Jones

Craig Jones demonstrates a transitional technique from Octopus Guard to a Front Headlock position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. This efficient maneuver provides a variety of attack options including chokes and takedowns. He also urges viewers to be creative in adapting and expanding on this transition in live sparring combat scenarios. A brief demonstration of setups and submissions from the achieved Front Headlock position is also provided.

Position: Octopus Guard Category: Transitions

Sick BACK TAKE from Butterfly Guard 👊 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

15s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video tutorial, by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu, focuses on implementing a back take from the Butterfly Guard position. Jordan demonstrates the grip and hip movement needed to control the opponent's movement. He emphasizes lifting the opponent and directing their body to the side to facilitate the transition into back control.

Technique: Back Take Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Transitions

Transition Mastery by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, world-renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu expert, Bernardo Faria, teaches the art of BJJ transitions. He explains the invisible technical aspects of moving from one position to another, a skill he deems crucial to becoming a complete fighter. Across four volumes of this series, he demonstrates combinations and progressions that he has mastered throughout his career, providing detailed insights on strategically and technically progressing the fight to a better position.

Position: Various Category: Transitions

Simple X GUARD entry from HALF GUARD 🔥 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

21s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video is an instructional guide by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu on how to transition from the half guard position to X guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The technique demonstrated involves inserting the butterfly hook and using the hand in the armpit to push the partner away before setting the second hook. The instructor also provides advice on how to handle situations when the opponent postures up.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

De La Riva Knee Bump Ashi Entry by Gordon Ryan

2m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan, one of the top No Gi grapplers, explains how to transition from the De La Riva Guard and Ashi Garami using a knee bump. He guides the viewer through the importance of off-balancing the opponent in order to effectively pummel the leg to the inside from the De La Riva Guard. He also provides insights on various following attacks, like tripod sweeps or progressing into X-guard, after successfully getting into the Ashi Garami position.

Position: De La Riva Guard Category: Transitions

Brutal Catch Wrestling Leg Riding and Hammer Locks by Joel Bane

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features Joel Bane teaching a specific grappling technique known as Catch Wrestling Leg Riding and Hammer Locks. These methods are designed to break through an opponent's guard and launch a series of attacks that target the back, legs and provoke submission. This training video incorporates different styles of grappling, stabilizing the best techniques from BJJ, Judo, and Catch Wrestling into a single system for top attacking strategies.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Guard Generic Category: Transitions

Gordon Ryan And Nicholas Meregali Teach Some Differences Between Jiu Jitsu With Gi And No…

10m · Gordon Ryan

In this YouTube video, the renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu competitors, Gordon Ryan and Nicholas Meregali, demonstrate the differences in techniques when attacking from the back position with a Gi and No-Gi. Ryan explains and demonstrates how high-percentage No-Gi strangles often come from the underhook side, where an arm is trapped before applying a strangle grip. On the other hand, Meregali showcases how similar attacks with a Gi often involve establishing grip first, and then throwing the leg over the shoulder. They point out how the No-Gi sequence usually involves trapping an arm first and then applying strangle, while in a Gi, the strangling grips are placed first and the leg thrown over second. In addition, they briefly discuss the challenges of transitioning between Gi and No-Gi jiu-jitsu.

Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

1 Easy Trick To Improve Your Granby Rolls #jiujitsu #mma #wrestling

25s · Etienne Duchesne

The video features instructor Etienne Duchesne teaching a simple trick to improve the Granby Roll, a common transitional practice in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Duchesne emphasizes the importance of attacking the opponent's armpit with the hip during the roll. This approach allows the practitioner to effectively roll over their opponent's arm, leading to a more successful and efficient transition.

Position: Transition Category: Transitions

World Class Back Takes From Bottom by Felipe Pena Preguica

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video by Felipe Pena covers diverse scenarios and guards from which you can transition to take your opponent's back – including closed guard, half guard, De La Riva, 50/50, spider guard, and more. Techniques range from beginner to advanced. The video also covers key concepts for gaining control over your opponent, including threatening with chokes as you advance your position. These are the same techniques that helped Pena earn multiple world titles and double gold at ADCC 2017.

Technique: Back Take Position: Bottom Position Category: Transitions

Bernardo Faria is an Absolute Beast - BJJ Study

6m · Bernardo Faria

The video focuses on the competition strategies and techniques of Brazilian Jiu Jitsu world champion Bernardo Faria. It highlights his adept skills in using half guard and deep half guard positions as well as his signature pressure passing technique. Bernardo's game plan usually involves pulling guard to half guard and from there attempting to sweep or advance to deep half guard. The video further dissects how Bernardo uses the lapels to break his opponent's posture and secure unbreakable grips. This technique allows him to use his opponent's reactions to his advantage and sweep or transition to a better position. His ability to transition between half guard and deep half guard positions smoothly and leverage them for takedowns was critically analyzed as well.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Gordon Ryan's Easy to Learn Dilemma to Improve Your Jiu Jitsu

4m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches a basic half guard transition strategy, utilizing knee levers and butterfly hooks to create a dilemma for the opponent. Firstly, if the opponent's knee is on the floor, Gordon demonstrates how to use a knee lever to either return to inside position or take over bottom position. Additionally, if the opponent counters the knee lever by removing his knee from the floor, Gordon shows how to quickly switch to butterfly hooks to apply off-balances and attempt various sweeps or submissions. This strategy is designed to help the practitioner regain the inside position and can be used in both upper and lower body battles.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

The Budokon Mobility System by Cameron Shayne and Xande Ribeiro

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video offers a comprehensive teaching of the Budokon Mobility System by Cameron Shayne and Xande Ribeiro. The focus lies on understanding the five primary positions of mobility and how they can enhance your Jiu-Jitsu game. It helps connect to different positions seamlessly, promoting efficiency during transitions. Additionally, the video emphasizes developing a more sound relationship between your upper and lower body to boost awareness and mindfulness during movement.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Other Category: Transitions

Closed guard to the back (Lachlan Giles)

11m · Lachlan Giles

The video features BJJ Ace Lachlan Giles demonstrating a transition from the closed guard using the arm across technique to take the opponent's back. He discusses the importance of the arm-across as a fundamental feature of effective closed guard playing. He first explains about getting the opponent's arm across the body, managing their reaction, and then breaking their posture. He narrates the detailed steps in handling the hand and the elbow to get it across effectively. He then shows how to transition towards taking the back by maintaining no space between the bodies, managing posture, and dealing with potential resistance from the opponent holistically. This video is clear, insightful, and contains a wealth of knowledge for improving one's BJJ game.

Technique: Back Take Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

Free Technique: Back Take Option from X Guard | Tainan Dalpra | X Guard Masterclass | AOJ+

6m · Tainan Dalpra

In the video, Tainan Dalpra, a 2x black belt world champion, demonstrates a back take option from the X Guard. He begins by discussing the importance of off balancing your opponent in order to successfully execute this technique. The demonstration is detailed, showing how to transition from the X Guard to the back whilst maintaining control through grip swapping. The technique also includes an option to handle defensive moves from the opponent, such as grabbing the collar, which can be circumvented with off balancing.

Technique: Back Take Position: X Guard Category: Transitions

Precision Back Takes by Lucas Lepri

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features renowned lightweight black-belt Lucas Lepri, who presents a number of effective back taking techniques from both top and bottom positions. The key to these techniques lies in their application from common positions, such as half-guard, open-guard and knee cuts. Emphasising the effectiveness of these methodologies, Lepri assures viewers that there is no need for extreme flexibility or inversion to successfully take the back.

Technique: Back Take Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

K guard BJJ #mma #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu

18s · Tum Energia

The video provides an instructional guide on transitioning from a closed guard to a backside heel hook using the K-guard technique. The instructor, Tum Energia, demonstrates attaching the leg with a tight butterfly grip to switch to K-guard when the opponent is standing and controlling the grips. The technique involves reaping over, blocking the back leg of the opponent with the far side foot, lifting it, and finishing off with a backside heel hook.

Technique: Heel Hook Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

Reverse De la Riva to Saddle Entry No Gi BJJ

57s · Alec Baulding

In this video, instructor Alec Baulding demonstrates how to transition from a reverse De La Riva guard to a saddle. He emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's ankle, reaching underneath for the underhook, and using a spin to initiate the transition. Alec then details how to target the opponent's ankle, allowing for a smooth rotation and entry into the saddle or 411 position. This video is useful for those looking to strengthen their ground game and implement more dynamic transitions.

Position: Reverse De La Riva Guard Category: Transitions

The Berimbolo and Beyond by The Miyao Brothers

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a tutorial on the Miayao Brothers' Berimbolo technique. It gives viewers the opportunity to learn modern BJJ tricks championed by these innovative grapplers that have transformed the entire Jiu Jitsu game. While viewers may choose not to implement the techniques, watching can guide understanding of what “new school guys” are attempting in their BJJ practice. A great opportunity to broaden one's understanding and potentially transform their game.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Berimbolo Category: Transitions

The Catch Wrestling Cradle Sequence by Neil Melanson

10m · Neil Melanson

In this video, MMA coach Neil Melanson demonstrates the Catch Wrestling Cradle Sequence. This technique is versatile, as it can be used for submissions, controls, guard passes, and more. Melanson explains how to maintain control over an opponent who is trying to scramble or create space. He also emphasizes that timing is important in executing the cradle sequence effectively. Lastly, he shows several variations of the technique and how to employ it in different scenarios.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

The 2 Easiest Attacks Against the Turtle Position

4m · Stephan Kesting

This video, presented by Stephan Kesting, teaches two primary attacks against the turtle position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu and Judo. The first technique, the forearm trap, occurs when the opponent is tight and defensive in the turtle position; it relies on separating the opponent's elbow and knee and trapping the forearm for a potential reversal. The second strategy involves hunting for the material around the opponent's elbow and knee, sustaining weight while popping to the feet, and transitioning to the knee mount. Throughout the video, Kesting reinforces the importance of these techniques to disrupt the opponent's defense and create openings for other potential attacks.

Position: Turtle Category: Transitions

Attack The attacker by Marcelo Garcia

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

One of the most seasoned BJJ grapplers and coaches, Marcelo Garcia, provides a comprehensive guide to transitioning from defense to offense in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Using his signature elbow push system, Garcia shows how students can escape from bad positions, grip fight to maintain position, and stop their opponents from rushing into dominant attacks. The video further demonstrates how to flow smoothly into counterattacks with Marcelo demonstrating techniques from his favourite positions, such as the butterfly guard, single leg X, and the guillotine.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Transitions

Andre Galvao - Atos jiu jitsu BACK TAKE!!! MUST SEE!!

7m · Andre Galvao

This instructional video features Andre Galvao teaching an effective method to transition from half guard into a back take. He demonstrates the exact steps to take when the opponent attempts to underhook, leveraging it instead to swing and take the back. Emphasizing on driving the weight onto the opponent's arm and the importance of maintaining a grip on the shoulder before attempting the back take. Finally, he also explains how to effectively place hooks to secure the position while rolling, preventing the opponent's escape.

Technique: Back Take Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Levi Jones-Leary Teaches His Favorite Berimbolo Sequence

2m · Levi Jones-Leary

In this YouTube video, Levi Jones-Leary, well-known for his prominence as a berimbolo specialist, demonstrates his preferred entry for the berimbolo sequence. Jones-Leary highlights the importance of angle and grip control while transitioning from the back side to the mount position. He provides details on how to respond to predictable defensive actions such as the opponent turning towards him or attempting to escape. He concludes by showing the complete execution of the sequence with the berimbolo resulting in taking the back.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Berimbolo Category: Transitions

In-Depth Arm Drags by Jeff Glover

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, BJJ champion Jeff Glover discusses the arm drag technique, regarded as one of the most critical skills in grappling. Glover shares high-percentage arm drag techniques, troubleshooting tactics, and seamless sequences. Viewers have the opportunity to learn several arm drags from a variety of positions and scenarios. Additionally, the video includes rolling footage and drills to assist in understanding these techniques in real-life situations and aid in developing muscle memory.

Position: Standing — Hand Ties Category: Transitions

Reverse De La Riva 10th Planet Jiu Jitsu No Gi BJJ #shorts

30s · Kuwy Jitsu

The video is a quick instructional clip presented by Kuwy Jitsu on performing a transition from the Reverse De La Riva position to a Butterfly Hook in No Gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes the importance of underhooking your partner's ankle with your bicep to get closer and help you bridge on your shoulder. This movement allows space for the free arm to hook under the hamstring to assist in pulling yourself under. Finally, he shows how to control the hips after pushing the opponent down.

Position: Reverse De La Riva Guard Category: Transitions

The move that built the career of Craig Jones - BJJ Analysis

8m · Not Mapped

This instructional video delves into the strategy that Craig Jones uses, specifically from the half guard position. The video principally focuses on two techniques: the backstep and spin-the-leg. These two techniques were used efficiently by Craig Jones, mainly early in his career, to create dilemmas for his opponents. The instructor highlights the importance of combining these two techniques while entering from the bottom half guard and shows how to effectively deal with a few common counters from opposition.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Basics To Advanced: The Leg Drag by Aaron Benzrihem

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The instructor, Aaron Benzrihem, teaches a comprehensive course on the Leg Drag transition in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The course is more than 4 hours long and contains instruction on implementing this technique from various positions and against different guards, both in Gi and No Gi. The first volume covers the basics of control, concepts, movement, and mechanics to help students understand and implement the technique effectively. Moreover, it also teaches how to use this transition to attack the back and even make submissions.

Position: Open Guard Category: Transitions

Learn the Crab Ride w Espen Mathiesen

9m · Espen Mathiesen

Espen Mathiesen demonstrates the Crab Ride Move, a powerful back attack system in modern jiu-jitsu, with multiple entry points from different positions. He highlights how crucial it is to have strong hooks to control your partner and maintain the position, particularly emphasizing the need to pinch the knees downwards. He also prefers to tripod, positioning his forehead on the mat and kicking with his legs to control the hooks. The balance and control in this position also allow for momentum to switch sides quickly. He ends off by showing how to transition to the back using the Crab Ride.

Technique: Back Attack Systems Position: Crab Ride Category: Transitions

Combining Leg Drag and Taking The Back

41s · Jon Thomas

The video taught viewers how to transition effectively in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu by combining leg drag with a back take. The instructor demonstrated approaching for a leg drag pass, before controlling the hip and getting the lapel to come up for the pass. He discussed a common defense wherein the opponent pulls his knees to his chest and how to use this to roll through to the back. The instructor emphasized the importance of keeping the opponent's hips off the floor to facilitate the transition to the back take.

Technique: Back Take Position: Open Guard Category: Transitions

No Gi Berimbolo System Part 1 by Mikey Musumeci

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Mikey Musumeci, a multiple-time IBJJF world champion, provides an instructional video on the No-Gi Berimbolo System. The video discusses a step-by-step process of the back take attack, including ways to make it work for people who are not necessarily quick or flexible. It teaches ways to outmaneuver opponents, troubleshoot common Berimbolo challenges, and move to the back with techniques like twister hooks, step stomps, and crab hooks. The video is described as a step towards unleashing BJJ potential.

Technique: Berimbolo Position: Berimbolo Category: Transitions

Take mount like Khabib (Lachlan Giles)

5m · Lachlan Giles

This video, taught by Lachlan Giles, focuses on transitioning from side control to the mounted position, emulating the style of Khabib Nurmagomedov. The video emphasizes the importance of maintaining control throughout the transition, particularly by ensuring the opponent’s legs remain pinned together and blocked by the hips and elbow. Giles also discusses how to navigate the opponent’s frames and finish the transition with a locked triangle above the knee. Overall, the video offers comprehensive practical instruction on smoothly moving from side control to mount.

Position: Side Control Category: Transitions

The 5 Types of X Guard

4m · Stephan Kesting

The video, hosted by Stephan Kesting, instructs viewers on the five major types of X Guards in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. These include the single-leg X, overhook X, standard X, the 'wrong way' X, and scissor X. The instructor provides detailed explanation and demonstration of each variation of the X Guard, discussing their uses, their connectivity with one another, and their various pros and cons. The video ends with emphasis on the single leg X, which was to be the subject of the rest of the instructional content.

Position: X Guard Category: Transitions

Shin Whizzer by Neil Melanson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, BJJ expert Neil Melanson explains and demonstrates his Shin Whizzer system. Neil applies techniques from various martial arts such as catch wrestling, Brazilian Jiu Jitsu, No Gi, among others into his own unique system. He provides in-depth details about his integrated grappling system, specifically on his approach to back attacking. He explains his preference for using one hook with a crossed ankle underneath his opponent rather than using both hooks from the back.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

This is a powerful combination for transitioning from an ankle lock attack to a crab ride…

24s · JonThomasBJJ

This video tutorial by JonThomasBJJ demonstrates a transition technique from an ankle lock to a crab ride. When the initial ankle lock doesn't work, the instructor guides you in altering the grip to secure the opponent's ankle over your arm. From there, insert a crab hook with your right foot and apply pressure. Should the opponent turn back, the instructor explains the process of rolling through and taking their back.

Technique: Crab Ride Position: Ankle Lock Category: Transitions

Hip Bump Entry From Closed Guard by Craig Jones

2m · Craig Jones

This YouTube video is an instructional piece in which black belt Craig Jones teaches a variant of the traditional Hip Bump Sweep from the closed guard position. This transition is efficient when the opponent is postured very high or not very active. The goal with this technique is to utilise collar tie to cause the opponent to post their hand on the floor as they defend against what appears to be a standard Hip Bump Sweep. Once the hand is posted, the instructor demonstrates how to pull your knees in towards your chest and set up for the triangle position to control the opponent efficiently.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Transitions

10th Planet Top Game No Gi Back Takes by PJ Barch

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Instructor PJ Barch shares an effective technique for transitioning from guard passing to back acquisition in No Gi Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He emphasizes the importance of always creating opportunities for back exposure. The video includes new drills for conditioning your body to constantly be in the position of advantage, giving you a reliable blueprint for dominating exchanges.

Technique: Back Take Position: Top Control Category: Transitions

Crab Ride Back Take: CRAIG JONES BJJ Techniques

4m · Craig Jones

The video teaches how to execute a Crab Ride Back Take by Craig Jones, an accomplished BJJ grappler. The technique involves initiating from an outside standing position, rotating the opponent to open their guard, pulling them down to the floor, and transitioning into the crab ride. Key steps include creating a shallow hook with the right foot to grip the opponent, reaching deep with the right hand to grasp the legs and rolling over the right shoulder. Then left leg is used to sit the opponent up, allowing for securing a back take.

Position: Crab Ride Category: Transitions

A Filthy Casual's Guide to Pantoja: Crab Rides and Strangles

6m · Jack Slack

In this instructional video, Jack Slack discusses the technique used by UFC fighter Alexandre Pantoja, specifically focusing on his use of the "crab ride" transition. The instructor explains how Pantoja often inverts himself between his opponent's legs to come out in a crab ride position, providing opportunities to take his opponent's back or move into a top position. He also highlights Pantoja’s proficiency in finishing rear naked chokes. Slack not only explains the technique but also demonstrates its practical applications in MMA, especially in the context of Pantoja’s fighting strategy.

Position: Crab Ride Category: Transitions

The Upside Down: Inverted Attacks by Jon Blank

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features Jon Blank teaching the Rolly Polly Sweep from the inversion position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes that successful execution of this unorthodox sweep is more about proper body placement and technique rather than flexibility. Furthermore, Jon provides comprehensive instructions on using EBI-style tactics, which could give practitioners a competitive advantage.

Technique: Bridge & Roll Sweep Position: Transition Category: Transitions

HIP BUMP from OCTOPUS - Neil Melanson

23s · Neil Melanson

The video is a short instructional clip in which Neil Melanson demonstrates a transition from the Octopus Guard position to a Hip Bump Sweep. The setup involves foiling an opponent's attempt to create pressure, then a swift transition to a hand and a return of said pressure to unbalance the opponent. This is followed by pinning and repummelling, ending with a shoulder drop to secure the Hip Bump Sweep.

Technique: Hip Bump Sweep Position: Octopus Guard Category: Transitions

MARCELO GARCIA: X-GUARD TO THE BACK

2m · Marcelo Garcia

In this video, Marcelo Garcia, one of the world's top Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) competitors and instructors, teaches a transition from the X-guard position to a back take. Starting from a double underhook, Garcia demonstrates gaining control of an opponent's leg leading to the X-guard position. From there he emphasizes the balance disruptions that set up the back take. Garcia provides intricate details on how to control the opponent's arm and leg, maintaining balance, and how to securely reach the back even if the opponent tries to stand up or move away.

Technique: Back Take Position: X Guard Category: Transitions

Killer Catch Wrestling Combos by Erik Paulson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video, presented by Erik Paulson, teaches the art of Catch Wrestling Combos, a transition technique that keeps your opponent off balance when the fight hits the ground. Paulson demonstrates how to genuinely dominate with this innovative form of groundwork. He provides a unique viewpoint on hunting submissions using crippling Catch Wrestling Combos, thus empowering the learners with an offensive onslaught that their opponents are not prepared to defend.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Ground Category: Transitions

Easy Entry into X-Guard from Seated Shin-on-Shin #xguard #bjj #jiujitsu #jiujitsu4life #b…

49s · Ben Kool Tech

This video is a quick tutorial by Ben Kool Tech, who demonstrates an easy transition from the seated shin-on-shin position to the x-guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. After establishing shin-on-shin contact with his opponent, he stresses the importance of wrapping the leg and driving weight onto the other foot. Instead of grabbing the outside, he opts for an underhook and lifts the leg up. This allows for a simple push and transition into the X guard.

Position: X Guard Category: Transitions

Rolling Triangle From the Clamp by John Danaher

3m · John Danaher

In this video, instructor John Danaher teaches how to perform Rolling Triangle from the Clamp position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He explains the principles of the upper body Ashi Garami, the importance of inside control, and how to use your foot to manipulate your opponent's posture. The demonstration covers how to transition from the clamp position, execute a roll, and end in a strong mounted triangular choke. Techniques for countering potential defenses from the opponent are also illustrated.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Clamp Category: Transitions

My Evolution Your Revolution: ADCC 2019 Analysis by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is part of an unprecedented series where Gordon Ryan breaks down his dominant performance at the ADCC 2019. He shares step-by-step instructions on the major techniques he used during his matches. The focus of this video is on the back attacks that helped him secure five victories over elite opponents. Through this series, viewers can learn the systems that have made Gordon Ryan the best no-gi grappler on Earth.

Position: Back Control Category: Transitions

HOW TO GET CHEST TO CHEST #1 Gordon Ryan

27s · Gordon Ryan

The video features BJJ superstar, Gordon Ryan explaining a guard passing method to get chest to chest contact with the opponent. He emphasizes the importance of working around the opponent's frames, using a cross shoulder post. He also describes a 'pull-push' game, which includes a hip switch and an over back grip to gain control over the opponent's head and shoulders. Once control is gained, Gordon demonstrates how to easily start getting "chest to chest" and pass the guard, even if the opponent attempts to push away.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Other Category: Guard Passing

Powerful CLOSED GUARD PASS! 💥 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

27s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video teaches a powerful technique for passing the Closed Guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Instructor Jordan demonstrates how to trap the opponent's arm behind their back, slide down the wrist while placing the head on the mat, and then transition the opponent's hand from one hand to the other to achieve a dominant position. He highlights the importance of keeping legs flat on the mat and using the hip-switch to overcome a tight guard. The video ends with Jordan inviting viewers to check out his Jiu-Jitsu Theory course.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Passing the Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video presents an instructional lesson from BJJ expert and coach, John Danaher on his unique 5-step system for guard passing. It aims to simplify one of the most difficult tasks in BJJ, making it more efficient and precise. The teachings are a part of Danaher's unified system for dealing with the guard, focusing on the crucial steps and requirements for the guard passer. The system has proved successful for notable athletes like Gordon Ryan, Garry Tonon, and GSP.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Jiu-Jitsu Guard Passes | 6 Basic but Effective Guard Passes for Gi or No Gi

7m · Eli Knight

In this YouTube video, Knight Jiu-Jitsu instructor Eli Knight teaches basic seated and standing guard passes for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioners. The techniques he explains apply to both gi and no gi and can be used against a variety of opponents, considering both novice to advanced players. He provides a step-by-step demonstration, emphasizing key principles and scenarios to strategically gain advantage over opponents. Techniques taught include risk to biceps blocks, using elbows to pry, pinning the leg down and side control, among others.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

BJJ: Renzo Gracie's tip for opening any guard

4m · Renzo Gracie

In this YouTube video, Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu Instructor Renzo Gracie provides a technique to open up an opponent's guard. This strategy is useful especially when facing an opponent who is heavier or taller, as it helps prevent exposure to arm lock, triangle, and other submissions. Renzo emphasizes on the importance of posture control and positioning, including a side stance and secure grip placement to protect against an armlock. He also explains how to put pressure on the opponent's hip by correctly placing the foot and popping up the leg. The video also demonstrates a method for standing up and maintaining balance, which can be useful for smaller or lighter fighters.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Systematically Attacking The Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video presents Gordon Ryan's 3-part, systematic approach to guard passing. Ryan, an ADCC World Champion and IBJJF No Gi Double Gold Black Belt World Champion, teaches his method which works regardless of size or skill level. In over 10 hours of detailed instruction and analysis of live sparring footage, he demonstrates how he dissects and bypasses the guard of highly skilled opponents. Emphasizing knowledge as the key to winning, Ryan shares insights from his intense, focused study of passing.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

5 Tips To Pass ANY Guard by John Danaher

36m · John Danaher

John Danaher provides instructional content discussing five vital tips to improve and succeed in passing any guard within Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He begins with the emphasis on maintaining proper posture and base when stand up in an opponent's open guard. Danaher explains how to prevent the common guard player's technique of manipulating the opponent's head and hip positions to break their posture. The key takeaways include maintaining an upright chest (head higher than hips) and distributing weight evenly across the whole foot, not just the ball or heels. This way, practising these techniques can build a strong foundation for successful guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

HOW TO OPEN CLOSED GUARD - JOHN DANAHER

39s · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher teaches how to open closed guard in BJJ. He demonstrates the steps of coming up, putting one knee in the center and flexing the hamstring. The key details are to walk the left leg into alignment, posturing the knee right on the opponent's tailbone, and then inserting a knee post in the center to break the opponent's closed guard.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: No Gi Guard Passing by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an expert instructional from Professor John Danaher, who shares his proven techniques on No-Gi Guard Passing, focusing particularly on the Toreando footwork. The tutorial covers the central principles of passing from various guard forms including half guard, closed guard, supine guard, and seated guard. Danaher, as one of the most detailed and innovative coaches globally, provides insights into establishing control and stabilizing the position as part of the pass. The tutorial is aimed at giving its viewers a unified framework for passing, illustrated with the best ways to ensure dominance against the bottom player.

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Easiest System to Pass The Open Guard

38s · Jon Thomas

Jon Thomas explains a simple system for passing the open guard. The system begins with firmly establishing a grip on the opponent's pants and then backing up to create distance, which makes it harder for the opponent to break the grip. The next step varies based on the opponent's position: for a wide leg, a knee cut pass can be performed; if the leg is shielded, the ankle can be grabbed, pushed down, and passed with a run around pass; if a grip can be established on the leg, a toriondo pass can be executed.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Best No Gi Guard Passing System On The Planet by Gordon Ryan

12m · Gordon Ryan

The video is a 12-minute tutorial from BJJ instructor Gordon Ryan, teaching his Passing Guard System 2.0 in a No Gi context. He explains the importance of getting past the opponent's hip line, known as the "J-point", and camping there. He demonstrates a series of techniques like Toriyando passing, high-step passing, and preventing the opponent's guard recovery through effective head placement and maintaining pressure. He also outlines how to smoothly transition into other later positions, such as half guard, based on the opponent's reactions. The tutorial stresses the role of adaptability and energy conservation during guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass Guards Quickly and Easily Using Leg Attacks by Craig Jones

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Craig Jones, a renown BJJ world champion, shares his expertise on the technique of using leg attacks to pass guards. Originating from Australia, Craig Jones has garnered accolades at high-profile championships such as EBI and ADCC, as well as Polaris Middleweight Champion. He emphasizes that his passing series, particularly this leg attack strategy, could significantly improve your guard passing performance. This series will not only advance your BJJ skills but also make the sport more enjoyable.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

57 BJJ Guard Passing Techniques in Just 8 Minutes - Jason Scully

8m · Jason Scully

This video features instructor Jason Scully demonstrating 57 guard passing techniques in a little over eight minutes. As a reference video rather than detailed instructional, it quickly shows each technique without getting too in-depth on any one move. Techniques shown include various forms of stack passes, over-under passes, knee cutter passes, and passes from the butterfly guard among others. Despite the ghee worn by Scully, many of the demonstrated techniques can be used successfully without one.

Position: Various Category: Guard Passing

The Closed Guard Passing Video That Will Keep On Giving

5m · Jean Jacques Machado

This video features 5th degree Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu black belt instructor, Jean Jacques Machado, demonstrating techniques to pass closed guard. He emphasises the importance of body positioning and leverage to effectively break open your opponent's guard – mainly focusing on keeping your shoulders behind your opponent's belt and using your hips for connection and pressure. Machado highlights that the concept of 'looking straight forward' instead of at the opponent can streamline your body shape and make it more difficult for the opponent to maintain their guard. He also teaches how to properly deflect the opponent's legs to move into a controlling position.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Guard Passing Anthology: Half Guard by Lachlan Giles

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The instructional video by Lachlan Giles covers the techniques of passing half guard. He offers more than 10 hours of educational content which aims to dramatically elevate the BJJ game of the viewer. The course also explores how to manipulate the opponent from the half guard, use their weight against them for passing, and techniques for mounting and taking the back from half guard. The sheer length and extensive detail ensure a comprehensive understanding of all the secrets to half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

This is the BEST way to open the closed guard. Take notes!

27s · Matt Arroyo

In this video, UFC veteran and BJJ black belt instructor Matt Arroyo presents a foolproof method for opening the closed guard. Arroyo teaches to first posture up, step the knee up and turn it, which weakens the opponent's position. The next move is to place the hand inside and lean with an entire body rotation to break open the guard. Once the closed guard is open, this creates opportunities for knee-over passes or coming under for other passes.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

The EASIEST Passing System For Both Gi & Nogi BJJ

7m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video provides a comprehensive guide on implementing a BJJ guard passing system that is applicable to both Gi and Nogi fighting styles. Jordan elaborates on two techniques — the Knee Slide and Side Smash Pass, which function in symbiosis. If an opponent attempts to block one technique, the other would be available. Furthermore, the instructor provides a detailed breakdown of the Headquarters Position, which serves as the foundation for executing both passes. Jordan also shares key nuances and grip strategies related to each technique to improve their effectiveness.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Guard Head Quarters Category: Guard Passing

Battle Tested Pressure Passing by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Bernardo Faria, a 5x black belt World Champion, teaches the techniques of his Battle-Tested Pressure Passing system. This system focuses on the Over/Under Pass, and according to Faria, does not require athleticism or strength. Instead, it relies on simple concepts and pressure. He assures that these methods can effectively deal with any guard style and can be especially helpful against flexible guard players.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Nicky Rod's Famous PASS!! #ajj #jiujitsu

30s · Nicky Rod

The video features Nicky Rod demonstrating his famous Body Lock Pass. He begins by achieving the body lock position, then if the opponent counters with hooks, he sprawls the right hip and drags over the mat towards the left. From there, he slides up to get a two-on-one grip and uses a ten-finger grip to rotate the elbow inside if the opponent is pinching his knees. He then steps over and performs a quick back step to secure side control.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Side Control Category: Guard Passing

How to pass the half guard!

52s · Matt Arroyo

The video is an instructional by Matt Arroyo on passing the half guard using the Twisted Half Guard Pass. He explains how to effectively control your opponent's leg and gradually work your foot free from the guard. He emphasizes on maintaining body balance and leg control even after freeing your leg to forestall opponent's reversal. More techniques and details can be found on his website.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Body Lock Pass by Lachlan Giles

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video teaches the technique of executing the Body Lock Pass, a powerful tool for passing guards in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Lachlan Giles, an ADCC veteran and world medalist, breaks down the strategy behind the body lock passing system in a comprehensive, step-by-step, 6-volume course. In addition to detailed explanations, the course includes narrated rolling footage for students to learn how to apply the technique in actual sparring situations.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Body Lock Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass Sit Guard by GORDON RYAN

55s · Gordon Ryan

This video instructs on how to pass the sit guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Focusing mainly on hand fighting, instructor and BJJ World Champion, Gordon Ryan, emphasizes the importance of movement and breaking the opponent's grip. He suggests feigning with the lead legs, creating angles, and then separating the opponent's elbows from their body, before changing levels and locking onto the opponent's body. This technique ensures safety from sweeps and leg locks, allowing the practitioner to step over the opponent's knee and either pass to side control or move into a half guard, ready for a pass.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Easiest Pass in Jiu Jitsu

29s · Jon Thomas

This video demonstrates the principle of Knee Drive and Over Extension as a powerful guard passing technique in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Jon Thomas emphasizes on creating extensions by jamming opponent's legs while they resist back. The instructor details how applying pressure on the opponent's legs, and pulling them open when they push back, can create an opening for a successful guard pass.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

Understanding The Distance On Top by Gui Mendes

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video tutorial features 4-time World Champion and revered BJJ black belt Gui Mendes as he explains the conceptual aspects of guard passing from the top position. Mendes dissects key details about maintaining far, medium, and near distances to ensure effective guard passing. He supplements his instruction with mobility drills that help in mastering fluidity and technique for guard passing and top work. Mendes not only demonstrates individual moves but also links them to form strategic systems to improve your overall BJJ game.

Position: Top Control Category: Guard Passing

A CONCEPTUAL Approach To Passing The Guard | Gi & Nogi BJJ Theory

9m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video, presented by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu, instructs viewers on the conceptual approach to passing the Guard in BJJ. This approach offers four primary ways to do so: through, around, over, and under the Guard. The basic principle behind this strategy is to avoid, or effectively manage, the opponent's feet, thereby evading their initial layer of defense. Jordan further clarifies the difference between being in the opponent's guard and the opponent having a Guard, illustrating the difference with examples from the headquarters position. He emphasizes understanding these concepts, rather than rote learning of techniques, to improve the effectiveness of future learning and execution during matches.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How To Perfect Your Guard Passing No Gi by John Danaher

21m · John Danaher

In this video, BJJ instructor John Danaher shares his knowledge on guard passing in a no-gi context. Danaher, known for his students' excellent leg locking skills, emphasizes the importance of mastering guard passing to be able to attack effectively. He explains that there are four main scenarios that require specific guard passing strategies and starts by focusing on dealing with a closed guard. He stresses that diversification in attacking is CRUCIAL in BJJ, reinforcing that only attacking the legs or upper body limits a practitioner's ability to be successful in submissions.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Half Guard Passing and Dynamic Pins: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu coach, instructs the viewer on how to pass half guard and apply dynamic pins in this instructional video. He emphasizes the importance of transitioning efficiently from one pin to the next while maintaining control. The video is part of Danaher's "Go Further, Faster" series, designed to help BJJ students of all levels improve rapidly.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The MOST Important Guard Passing Principle

9m · Jon Thomas

This video by Jon Thomas discusses the important principle of hip pinning in guard passing. Thomas describes two primary types of pinning - shoulder blade pin and hip pin - and dives deep into the latter. This technique involves locking both sides of your opponent's pelvis or hips to the floor during a pass, making it difficult for them to rotate or recompose their guard. Demonstrating several practical examples, such as the toriondo pass and the knee cut pass, the instructor highlights how hip pinning can significantly restrict an opponent's leg mobility and ease guard passing.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan Explains His Guard Passing System

6m · Gordon Ryan

This video features Gordon Ryan, a highly proficient no-gi grappler, presenting his innovative Guard Passing System. He introduces a well-structured system that he invented, combining three types of passing: loose pass, tight pass, and submission pass. Ryan thoroughly explains all three concepts and demonstrates how to seamlessly transition between them. He emphasizes the use of a unique leg pummeling technique, using heavy hands and light hips to efficiently manage opponent's legs while passing the guard. This specific guard passing strategy has been instrumental in Ryan's recent competitive success.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The Fastest Way: To Become an Effective Guard Passer (No Gi) by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features BJJ expert, John Danaher teaching effective No-Gi guard passing strategies. Viewers are exposed to a variety of passing systems including toreandos, leg drags, scoop/reverse scoop passing, tripod passing, and body moves. John emphasizes on developing a systematic approach that simplifies the guard passing process but allows the flexibility to adapt to opponents during combat. The video is part of John Danaher's game-changing series, "The Fastest Way."

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Smash Pass by Craig Jones

46s · Craig Jones

In this instructional video, Craig Jones demonstrates how to perform a smash pass from a base passing position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He first simulates a knee cut to elicit a predictable reaction from his opponent, which will then allow him to execute the smash pass. He also highlights the importance of pressuring the top leg during the pass and the use of the sprawl to establish control. The video is intended to help practitioners improve their guard passing skills.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Seven Stupid Simple Guard Passes | Jiu-Jitsu Tricks

7m · Eli Knight

This video, presented by Eli Knight, showcases various simple and effective guard passing techniques. Techniques demonstrated include a leg drag from seated guard, a step-through pass, and a guillotine threat to initiate a back take. Throughout the video, Knight emphasizes that these simple passes, because they are often overlooked, can be very successful in both training and competition scenarios. Examples are shown both from a general open guard and from a seated guard position.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Seated Guard Category: Guard Passing

Pressure Passing Encyclopedia by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Instructor and 5x World Champion Bernardo Faria showcases his famous over/under passing technique in this instructional video. He emphasizes that success with his pressure passing system does not require significant athleticism, flexibility, strength, or skill. Highlighting its effectiveness, he has used this system against notable practitioners like Leandro Lo, Roberto "Cyborg" Abreu, and Erberth Santos. The video promotes that understanding and applying this system can significantly improve one's guard passing technique.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Make passing the LASSO GUARD easy!!! #bjj

47s · Matt Arroyo

In this instructional video, Matt Arroyo (a BJJ black belt and UFC veteran) demonstrates his method for passing the Lasso Guard. Arroyo explains the common mistake of passing to the opposite side of the lasso, urging viewers instead to pass on the side of the lasso. He illustrates the steps which include rocking the opponent to the side of the lasso, swiveling the hand to the outside, using the knee to rip out, and then breaking the grip for passing. The ultimate aim of these step-by-step instructions is to provide an easier method to pass the opponent's lasso guard.

Position: Lasso Guard Category: Guard Passing

This Open Guard Split Pass is So Powerful

40s · Jon Thomas

In this video, Jon Thomas provides detailed instruction on an underused guard-passing technique called the Split Pass from Open Guard. He explains the strategic placement of the legs to split the opponent's guard, making it harder for them to attack. Thomas further demonstrates how to isolate and control the legs and the effective use of the drop pass when the opponent attempts to rebalance.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

The B Team Top Game: How to Work Against Seated Guards, Supine Guards, and Those Trying t…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructor Craig Jones teaches viewers how to improve their top game, specifically against opponents utilizing seated and supine guards. The video includes techniques for passing guards such as stacks, torreandos, and leg drags. Craig also offers insights on how to safely disengage from dangerous leg entanglements. The viewer is shown how to enforce rhythm and method to dominate the mat in no-gi circumstances.

Position: Top Control Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan J Point Camping Guard Pass #bjj #jiujitsu #bjjwiki #bjjfanatics #bjjaddict

34s · DomoBJJ

The video showcases an instructional guide on how to execute the 'J-Point Camping Pass'. This technique, developed by John Daner, is demonstrated by BJJ athlete Gordon Ryan and utilized frequently in his game. The objective of the move is to exhaust the opponent by forcing them to carry your weight using their own frames and lower abdominal muscles. The tutorial emphasizes maintaining a low head position, driving weight into the opponent's opposite shoulder to flatten them out, keeping their feet off of you and flaring your right elbow to prevent a high leg activity. The implementation of this strategy leads to a successful guard passing, ending in side control.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The BEST BJJ Passes For Beginners + COMMON MISTAKES | Gi & Nogi

9m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video provides a comprehensive tutorial on the four best passes for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu beginners, specifically focusing on the Torreando Pass and the Smash Pass. These passes are chosen for their low risk, high efficiency, and simplicity to learn. The coach Jordan gives step-by-step instructions on how to perform these passes correctly and highlights common mistakes that beginners often make. In addition, he offers tips on dealing with various defenses and emphasizes the importance of removing the guard player's grips to increase the success rate on the mats.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Systematically Attacking the Guard Body Lock Study by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, renowned grappler Gordon Ryan shares his comprehensive body lock system for successful guard passing. He delves into a range of techniques, such as front and side body locks, tight-waists, over-under body locks, high tripods and others, illustrating how to effectively break through the opponent's guard. He also introduces his "Golden Trilemma", a principle designed to create unstoppable passing threats. Additionally, Ryan offers breakdowns of his actual gym footage to demonstrate these techniques in action.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Learn How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Body Lock Pass by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches viewers how to execute a perfect Body Lock Pass in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He focuses on three key strategies: "stuffing", "shelving", and "splitting" the opponent's legs to effectively pass their guard while maintaining control. He presents detailed demonstrations on how to transform from a front body lock to a side body lock and back, and explains how to handle potential scenarios, such as the opponent trying to turn and escape. The video also includes tips on how to manage wrist injuries when executing this technique.

Position: Body Lock Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan Toreando to Knee on Belly

48s · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan presents a detailed explanation and demonstration of the Toreando Pass to a Knee on Belly position. He emphasizes the importance of closing the gap between his knees to prevent the partner from entering his legs. Ryan also demonstrates the transition to a head overhead position as a counter to the partner's attempts to off balance him. He further suggests using his hands to push back towards the partner's hips as a response to their bridging attempts.

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Knee On Belly Category: Guard Passing

No Gi Pressure Passing by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, 5x Black Belt World Champion Bernardo Faria teaches the No Gi Pressure Passing technique, specifically focusing on his infamous Over/Under Pass. Faria explains that this passing system does not require great athleticism, strength, or energy but relies heavily on proper pressure application. The viewers can expect to learn simple concepts to break any guard effortlessly and effectively counter flexible guard players.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

5 Tips To Pass Any Guard No Gi by Lachlan Giles

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this YouTube video, Lachlan Giles provides five practical tips on passing the guard in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes controlling the shins rather than the knees, pushing away the opponent's feet instead of allowing them to contact his torso, and gaining "inside position" on the opponent's legs to prevent their escape. Additionally, he highlights the importance of upper body control and demonstrates a handy technique to win the "inside space" during hand fighting.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

HEADQUARTERS is such a great position! 🙏 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

26s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

In the video, Instructor Jordan demonstrates the headquarters position, a powerful passing method in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He explains transitioning options from headquarters to methods like e-slides and side smashes. He emphasizes the importance of controlling the opponent's outside leg before going for inside leg control. This, he states, prevents the opponent from running a knee shield defense.

Position: Guard Head Quarters Category: Guard Passing

The Science of Guard Passing by Lucas Lepri

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide on the science of guard passing by Lucas Lepri. Lucas, a well-renowned competitor, shares his techniques and strategies to effectively diagnose and dismantle any guard, both in the gym and in competition. Viewers would gain an entirely new perspective on grappling that would transform their entire game. Lucas’s techniques are renowned for making even the best competitors seem like white belts.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

10 Tips To RAPIDLY Improve Your Guard Passing

10m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu provides 10 tips to rapidly improve your guard passing skills in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor explains concepts as well as physical techniques. For instance, he explains the importance of not stepping too close to the opponent's head to avoid giving them access to X-Guard, how to use the shin to consolidate the pass, and to minimize the amount of time spent on the knees unless the opponent's back is pinned to the mat. Additionally, the concept of strategically disengaging to re-engage is highlighted.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Half Guard Passing by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

The YouTube video features renowned BJJ instructor John Danaher teaching the art of perfect Jiu Jitsu half guard passing. Danaher starts by explaining the difference between conventional guard passing and half guard passing, highlighting that the half guard strategy is a drastically different approach to bypassing the opponent's guard. In this approach, he emphasises upon the control of the opponent's head, which contrasts with the common focus on controlling the hips in traditional guard passing. He introduces a key movement called the 'cranial shift', which involves switching the focus from the opponent's hips to their head. The video is essentially a tutorial on this half guard passing technique.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Systematically Attacking The Guard 2.0 by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, several-time ADCC champion, Gordon Ryan, teaches his unique high-stepping method for effectively passing stubborn guards such as the Reverse De La Riva, De La Riva, and Ashi Garami. Gordon shares his methodology and offers advice on how to apply this system to revolutionize your guard passing game. He emphasizes the potency of the flanking position and the importance of strategically weaponizing the j point. Viewers also get to see this system in action through actual gym footage, broken down by Gordon for a clearer understanding of the moves.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

6 approaches to passing the knee shield (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles, a notable BJJ black belt, demonstrates six approaches to passing the knee shield while in half guard. Giles emphasizes the importance of forethought and prevention in dealing with the knee shield, suggesting to ideally block the knee shield before it fully forms. The video goes on to cover various techniques such as walking back to center, pushing the hip or foot, and swinging the hips in front of the leg for successful guard passing strategies against the knee shield. All these strategies are explained with detailed steps and practical tips for when these approaches would be most effective during a BJJ match.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The MOST Important Passing Position in Jiu Jitsu

14m · Jon Thomas

In this YouTube video, Jon Thomas explains an effective system for passing guard in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu by utilizing the Headquarters Position, a pivotal position in which you trap your opponent's leg, thereby limiting their defensive options. Thomas offers a twist on the traditional approach, suggesting to control the lapel with the left hand and the leg with the right hand, to better prevent the opponent from pushing you away and escaping. The video offers in-depth explanations and demonstrations on how to effectively implement this technique, revealing multiple scenarios and responses based on potential opponent reactions.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Guard Head Quarters Category: Guard Passing

Systematically Attacking The Guard: Half Guard Passing by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Gordon Ryan, multiple-time ADCC champion, teaching his half guard passing system, specifically how to systematically attack different kinds of half guards like knee shield, butterfly, lockdown, and deep half guard. This system is optimized for all forms of grappling including no-gi, gi, and MMA. Additional footage of Gordon demonstrating these techniques during rolling in the gym is included, which he further analyzes for thorough understanding. This is an in-depth and comprehensive guide to mastering half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan Half Guard Pass

51s · Not Mapped

The YouTube video teaches about the technique to pass half guard like Gordon Ryan. Firstly, Ryan attempts to flatten his opponent through a cross face and an underhook. Faced with resistance, he wiggles his arm around until gaining the cross face grip, then reaches for his opponent's armpit for further control. To secure the underhook, he threatens sliding into mount, which prompts a pushback by his opponent, giving the space needed for the underhook. The video discusses the importance of butterfly grip and its execution to control and constrict space. Finally, Ryan tripods up and uses his instep to slide directly into mount.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

How Catch Wrestling Wrecks The Half Guard by Neil Melanson

14m · Neil Melanson

In this instructional video, Neil Melanson teaches how to use catch wrestling to counter an opponent's half guard. He specifically illustrates how to use a "wizard" technique to maintain control and consistently disrupt the opponent's position, thus preventing them from executing desirable scrambles or moves. Following the wizard, Melanson transitions into a "Quarter Nelson" and then into a "Darce choke." Throughout the explanation, he emphasizes the importance of understanding positioning, control, and the difference in pushing and pulling forces when applying these techniques.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Leg Pin Passing System by Kade & Tye Ruotolo

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Kade and Tye Ruotolo teaching their unique Leg Pin Passing System. They highlight the versatility of the Leg Pin Pass and demonstrate how it can connect to other passes for a continuous and unstoppable flow. Through their instructions, the viewer can develop a relentless passing rhythm that poses constant threats to their opponent. They aim to turn anyone into a "passing machine" with their method.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Check Out These 2 Jiu Jitsu Techniques When Passing Butterfly Guard!

56s · Malachy Friedman

In this video, instructor Malachy Friedman demonstrates two techniques for passing the butterfly guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu: a standard guard pass and a knee bar leg lock. The steps of the guard pass involve forcing the opponent's heels towards their bottom, doubling up on one leg and stepping over. The leg lock technique follows similar initial steps; however, instead of a full guard pass, Friedman opens space to position his knee for the knee bar, while keeping the opponent's foot trapped to prevent escape.

Position: Butterfly Guard Category: Guard Passing

If You Struggle Breaking Closed Guard as White Belt, Then Watch This Video

5m · Chewjitsu

This video is an instructional guide by Chewjitsu on how to break closed guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor explains the common mistakes beginners make and offers techniques to correct them. The video focuses on maintaining balance, optimum posture, and ideal positioning while attempting to open an opponent's closed guard. The instructor advises adhering to the "belly button or belt rule," which involves ensuring your center of gravity remains above your opponent's belt line to prevent off-balancing or being swept.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older or Less Athletic - Top Game No Gi by John Da…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instruction video is part of "Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older or Less Athletic" course by renowned coach John Danaher. In this video, he teaches strategies on how to overcome younger, more athletic opponents using technique rather than athleticism. He specifically discusses passing from the half guard position, offering detailed tips on maximizing connection to control opponents. Furthermore, he introduces his dynamic pinning system designed to exhaust more athletic adversaries while conserving the practitioner's energy. He also provides tools and techniques specifically optimised for older grapplers.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Opening Closed Guard Knee Post Method by John Danaher

7m · John Danaher

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, explains the method of opening a closed guard using the knee post technique in this instructional video. He describes the importance of posturing, positioning the knee between the opponent's buttocks, focusing pressure on the tailbone to gain control, and eventually break open the guard. He additionally provides advice on handling any potential issues, like the opponent's ability to pull with their legs or manipulations with the arms, and stresses upon the importance of maintaining control throughout. This video is beneficial for advanced control techniques in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu guard passing.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

GOAT METHOD for PASSING HALF GUARD EVERYONE SHOULD KNOW!!!

57s · Not Mapped

The video focuses on a technique for passing a half guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor presents a principle he credits to Gordon Ryan. Firstly, he advises against keeping the knee on the floor since it allows the opponent to off-balance you. Instead, he recommends keeping the right knee jammed into the opponent's hip and lifting the left knee outside the opponent's hip. The instructor also emphasizes the importance of switching from an open hip to a closed hip when going to a tripod to free the leg before passing the guard.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Stack Pass by Andre Galvao

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Black Belt World Champion Andre Galvao shares his knowledge on performing the safest and most effective stack pass, which is his pass of choice. He thoroughly explains the fundamentals of how to get into and win the position, making it a viable technique for any BJJ practitioner. The four-volume instructional series provides in-depth learning about the entries, variations, and finishes for the stack pass, allowing viewers to pressure around the guard successfully.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass the Seated Guard in BJJ

6m · Jon Thomas

The video, by Jon Thomas, focuses on techniques to pass the seated guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Starting with a brief overview of the mechanics of the position, Thomas demonstrates five major methods of passing the seated guard. Techniques include the 'Knee Cut Pass', where the top player grips fight and tries to catch an underhook, pulling it up high to prevent the opponent's re-pummelling. Another method is engaging the 'Toriondo/X Pass'; here, the top player grabs the opponent's lapel, pulling it down to create a strong pull, moves to the side, and executes the pass. The video contains detailed, step-by-step instructions and important cautionary advice.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Seated Guard Category: Guard Passing

BODY LOCK FOOT POST - Craig Jones

47s · Craig Jones

The video features BJJ expert Craig Jones instructing how to perform the Body Lock Foot Post, a technique used in Guard Passing. Jones initially secures his opponent in a body lock, then switches to angle imagining having trouble stepping over the opponent's leg. He explains that he would grip a single hand, reach back to grab the opponent's butterfly hook at the ankle, and push the opponent's foot out to create external rotation. With the opponent's resistance and weak angle, Jones demonstrates how he can easily walk over and stop the opponent's inside butterfly hook.

Position: Body Lock Category: Guard Passing

Engaging Without Regrets by Jozef Chen

$99.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features ADCC Champion, Jozef Chen, teaching techniques to defeat No-Gi Guard attacks and control the open guard game. The series explores profound concepts to help learners master the tricky approach of today's open guard directly used for wrestling up, entering leg entanglements and securing sweeps. Jozef gives detailed instructions on grip fighting, outflanking opponents, keeping them on their back, and securing a variety of passes. The video aims to help learners to engage both proactively and reactively to open guard positions and attacks.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

I pass the closed guard the SAME WAY every time in BJJ! #bjj #jiujitsu #jiujitsutips #mar…

2m · Robby Donofrio

In this video, Instructor Robby Donofrio demonstrates his method for passing the closed guard in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He explains that the key focus should be on limiting the opponent's ability to open their legs, as this is a prerequisite for all their potential moves from this position. Robby suggests a synchronized approach of defensive hand placement and strategic positioning to provoke the opponent into opening their guard, at which point one can immediately gain control and move to a dominant position. This approach, Robby assures, works exceptionally well against even the most skilled opponents.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan - Body Lock Guard Pass Off Their Underhook

3m · Gordon Ryan

The YouTube video hosted by BJJ Fanatics features the world-famous Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioner Gordon Ryan demonstrating a body lock guard pass from half guard when the opponent manages to get an underhook. Ryan stresses on the importance of maintaining a body lock to control the opponent's upper body, and using a butterfly hook to control the space between the opponent's knees. As a result, the practitioner is more likely to be successful in passing the guard and obtaining a secure top side control position.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Complete No Gi Guard Passing System by Marcelo Garcia

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video by 9-time World Champion Marcelo Garcia teaches an array of No-Gi Guard passing techniques, focusing on standing passes, back steps, and half guard passes. Marcelo shares his signature strategies to seamlessly combine these passes into a smoothly flowing system. The instructional also covers how to strategically counter many common no-gi guards such as butterfly, inverted guard, and De La Riva. This video is ideal for those looking to sharpen their guard passing skills in submission grappling.

Position: Open Guard Category: Guard Passing

Marcelo Garcia guard pass #shorts #bjj #bjjhighlights

24s · Marcelo Garcia

This video features BJJ legend Marcelo Garcia demonstrating his signature guard passing technique. Marcelo emphasizes the importance of maintaining a strong posture and offsetting the opponent's hip movement. He encourages practitioners to apply pressure on the opponent's stomach, and offers options to adapt the technique based on how the opponent reacts. In essence, the video teaches viewers how to effectively execute the Marcelo Garcia Guard Pass.

Position: Closed Guard Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass a Knee Shield

55s · Josh Saunders

In this YouTube video, jiu-jitsu instructor Josh Saunders explains two different techniques for passing an opponent's knee shield, a common defensive position in BJJ. The first technique involves using a hip wedge to turn the opponent's knees toward the ceiling, followed by bringing the right knee to the floor and landing chest-to-chest with a cross face. The second technique is useful when the opponent is facing towards you. It involves reaching over the back, connecting the right knee and elbow, and extending the opponent's leg away from their chest to establish control. He also provides a secret tip: the knee of the one passing should stay on the floor to minimize the distance between your hip and the opponent's knee.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The São Paulo Passing System by Leonardo Nogueira

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional tutorial that covers Leonardo Nogueira's Sao Paulo Passing System. In the video, Nogueira, a World Champion, dives deep into the secrets behind his passing system. He shows how to upgrade the basic Sao Paulo pass so that it becomes applicable and effective against anyone. The video covers how to execute a top game that works against all guards at the black belt level. The teaching is spread across four volumes in a step-by-step manner, providing the hidden details to become a guard passing machine like Nogueira.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan - Forcing Half Guard

38s · Gordon Ryan

This video shows Gordon Ryan teaching how to force the half guard in a Brazilian Jiu Jitsu match. The major emphasis is on ensuring that you implement the half guard on your terms. The technique involves employing a chest to chest approach. From this secured position, the opponent's reactions can be controlled, allowing for a more effortless pass.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Body Lock Pass: Standard version

5m · Lachlan Giles

This video features instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrating the steps of a body lock pass from the half guard position. He emphasizes preventing the opponent's leg from reaching the outside, using an underhook and one's own body positioning to block the opponent's leg, and shifting the opponent's hips to the side to improve positioning. After achieving the body lock, the instructor demonstrates how to step over the opponent's leg, shift hips and shoulder position, and eventually move into side control or mount as the situation allows. He also covers common defenses the opponent might use and how to counter them.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Surf Passing by Eduardo Telles

$39.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Eduardo Telles, one of the most reputable instructors in Brazil, teaches his unique guard passing technique, the Surf Passing. Eduardo elucidates his method extensively, providing viewers with insights that could potentially reform their whole game. He focuses on passing opponents during training and promises a fresh perspective on this specific aspect of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Lucas Lepri's Guard Passing System is a thing of Beauty - BJJ Study

14m · Lucas Lepri

The video is a detailed breakdown of Lucas Lepri's guard passing technique, focusing specifically on the knee cut. Lepri's approach to passing the knee shield and managing the pummeling of the legs is particularly analyzed. The video explores Lepri's success in fluidly adapting to opponents' defensive movements and turning these to his advantage, enabling him to safely pass the guard on multiple occasions. The video seeks to inform viewers about the effectiveness of Lepri's guard passing strategy and inspire them to adopt similar approaches in their own BJJ practice.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Knee Cut to Leg Drag with Levi Jones Leary and Lachlan Giles

6m · Levi Jones-Leary

Levi Jones Leary, with input from Lachlan Giles, demonstrates how to smoothly transition from a knee cut to a leg drag guard pass. Levi starts with the basics of a knee cut, emphasizing the importance of not giving your opponent the reverse Dela Riva hook. If the knee cut is impossible due to a strong knee shield or the opponent facing his hips towards you, Levi shows how to retract and transition into leg drag. This is achieved by bringing your weight back, extending the opponent's leg, hopping over their shin, and finally stepping over to establish a strong leg drag position. Note there are repeated demonstrations of the technique along with strategies to address the common issues faced.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Introduction To Pressure Passing by Murilo Santana

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video presents a detailed tutorial on Pressure Passing instructed by Murilo Santana. He goes through various positions like the half stack, full stack, and the over under. Santana debates concepts like pressure, connection, structure and shares insights he accumulated over years of experience. The video also includes footage of Santana practicing the techniques and provides entries and combos to overcome stubborn and flexible guards.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Guard Retention - How To Never Get Your Guard Passed In Jiu Jitsu by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video renowned Brazilian Jiu Jitsu athlete, Gordon Ryan, demonstrates how to retain guard. He emphasizes the importance of not allowing your opponent to pass your guard, particularly past your hips which he refers to as the "J point". Ryan demonstrates various grips and transitions to keep the opponent in front and avoid guard pass, stressing the concept of "stickiness" and constant off-balancing. He also outlines strategies for preventing the opponent from taking control of the head and keeping control of the inside position.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Jiu-Jitsu Guard Passes | 6 Basic but Effective Guard Passes for Gi or No Gi

7m · Eli Knight

In this YouTube video, Knight Jiu-Jitsu instructor Eli Knight teaches basic seated and standing guard passes for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioners. The techniques he explains apply to both gi and no gi and can be used against a variety of opponents, considering both novice to advanced players. He provides a step-by-step demonstration, emphasizing key principles and scenarios to strategically gain advantage over opponents. Techniques taught include risk to biceps blocks, using elbows to pry, pinning the leg down and side control, among others.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Guard Retention: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is a part of the 'Go Further Faster' series by renowned BJJ instructor, John Danaher. Focusing on the fundamental aspect of Guard Retention, Danaher discusses one of the most important skills - retaining your guard against an opponent who intends to pass and pin you down. He aims to identify and explain the foundational skills, movements, and concepts needed to reach full potential in jiu-jitsu. The series focuses on three major positions where we must fight to retain the guard.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

BJJ: Renzo Gracie's tip for opening any guard

4m · Renzo Gracie

In this YouTube video, Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu Instructor Renzo Gracie provides a technique to open up an opponent's guard. This strategy is useful especially when facing an opponent who is heavier or taller, as it helps prevent exposure to arm lock, triangle, and other submissions. Renzo emphasizes on the importance of posture control and positioning, including a side stance and secure grip placement to protect against an armlock. He also explains how to put pressure on the opponent's hip by correctly placing the foot and popping up the leg. The video also demonstrates a method for standing up and maintaining balance, which can be useful for smaller or lighter fighters.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How To Do The Perfect Triangle Choke Even If You Have Short Legs by John Danaher

13m · John Danaher

In this YouTube video, John Danaher, an acclaimed Jiu-Jitsu coach, teaches how to perform a perfect triangle choke, even for those with short legs. He emphasizes that the success of the triangle choke does not merely depend on leg length but also heavily on proper body positioning. He provides a detailed breakdown on the correct body positioning and provides instruction on how to lock in the triangle for a tight choke. The video serves as an informative guide for all skill levels, with or without shorter legs.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Passing the Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video presents an instructional lesson from BJJ expert and coach, John Danaher on his unique 5-step system for guard passing. It aims to simplify one of the most difficult tasks in BJJ, making it more efficient and precise. The teachings are a part of Danaher's unified system for dealing with the guard, focusing on the crucial steps and requirements for the guard passer. The system has proved successful for notable athletes like Gordon Ryan, Garry Tonon, and GSP.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Five mistakes every white belt makes when they start Jiu Jitsu. #jiujitsu #whitebelt

47s · Not Mapped

The video teaches five common mistakes that white belts in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu often make when they're in the guard position. First, the speaker warns against putting your hands on the mat, as it leaves you vulnerable to kimuras and omoplatas. Secondly, placing two hands on one side exposes your back and potentially getting choked. The third mistake is having two hands in or two hands out which can lead to getting caught in triangles. Fourthly, attempting to choke from within the guard can lead to arm bars. Finally, grabbing the head from inside the guard results in being off balance and unable to effectively fight against the legs.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

51 BJJ Guard Sweeps in Less Than 7 Minutes - Jason Scully

6m · Jason Scully

Jason Scully demonstrates multiple sweep techniques from various guard positions in this instructional video. Techniques showcased include spider guard, x guard, single leg x guard, de la riva guard, reverse de la riva guard, de la riva x guard, 50/50 guard, butterfly guard, sitting guard, closed guard, and open guard. This is not a detailed instructional video but rather an overview of 51+ sweeps, providing ideas and sparking creativity for practitioners. Jason Scully emphasizes the importance of combining techniques along with proper setups, transitions, grip and awareness of your opponent's next move.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Sweeps

Systematically Attacking The Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video presents Gordon Ryan's 3-part, systematic approach to guard passing. Ryan, an ADCC World Champion and IBJJF No Gi Double Gold Black Belt World Champion, teaches his method which works regardless of size or skill level. In over 10 hours of detailed instruction and analysis of live sparring footage, he demonstrates how he dissects and bypasses the guard of highly skilled opponents. Emphasizing knowledge as the key to winning, Ryan shares insights from his intense, focused study of passing.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

How to Pass Sit Guard by GORDON RYAN

55s · Gordon Ryan

This video instructs on how to pass the sit guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Focusing mainly on hand fighting, instructor and BJJ World Champion, Gordon Ryan, emphasizes the importance of movement and breaking the opponent's grip. He suggests feigning with the lead legs, creating angles, and then separating the opponent's elbows from their body, before changing levels and locking onto the opponent's body. This technique ensures safety from sweeps and leg locks, allowing the practitioner to step over the opponent's knee and either pass to side control or move into a half guard, ready for a pass.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Trick to sweep BIGGER & STRONGER opponents in Jiu Jitsu! #bjj #jiujitsu #jiujitsutips #ma…

1m · Robby Donofrio

In this video, Robby Donofrio introduces the Shoulder Crunch Sweep, a technique aimed to overcome bigger and stronger opponents from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He illustrates the importance of positioning the arm as a frame against the opponent's neck to create space and securing a high elbow 's' grip. Robby explains that this, accompanied by the partner's attempt to escape, can be used to achieve momentum for the sweep. He concludes the demonstration by showing how to sweep the opponent and gain the mount position.

Technique: Shoulder Crunch Sweep Position: Guard Generic Category: Sweeps

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: No Gi Guard Passing by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an expert instructional from Professor John Danaher, who shares his proven techniques on No-Gi Guard Passing, focusing particularly on the Toreando footwork. The tutorial covers the central principles of passing from various guard forms including half guard, closed guard, supine guard, and seated guard. Danaher, as one of the most detailed and innovative coaches globally, provides insights into establishing control and stabilizing the position as part of the pass. The tutorial is aimed at giving its viewers a unified framework for passing, illustrated with the best ways to ensure dominance against the bottom player.

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

A CONCEPTUAL Approach To Passing The Guard | Gi & Nogi BJJ Theory

9m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video, presented by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu, instructs viewers on the conceptual approach to passing the Guard in BJJ. This approach offers four primary ways to do so: through, around, over, and under the Guard. The basic principle behind this strategy is to avoid, or effectively manage, the opponent's feet, thereby evading their initial layer of defense. Jordan further clarifies the difference between being in the opponent's guard and the opponent having a Guard, illustrating the difference with examples from the headquarters position. He emphasizes understanding these concepts, rather than rote learning of techniques, to improve the effectiveness of future learning and execution during matches.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Easy BJJ Omoplata setup

10s · Not Mapped

The video is a short instructional tutorial explaining how to setup an Omoplata submission from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor demonstrates the steps, starting with establishing grips, controlling the opponent's posture, and then using footwork on the hip to stretch the opponent out. The exact technique name or further steps aren't detailed due to the video's short duration.

Technique: Omoplata Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

They Shall Not Pass by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Gordon Ryan, the ADCC Absolute Champion, presenting his guard retention system that can be employed in various positions including X guard, half guard, and seated guard. Gordon shows detailed techniques on how to prevent common passes such as knee cuts, torreando, and stacking. The 8-volume series not only showcases the techniques but also includes footage of Gordon performing these techniques live at the gym while narrating the process, giving a comprehensive understanding of the system.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

How To Do Perfect Guard Retention In BJJ by John Danaher

20m · John Danaher

John Danaher discusses the topic of guard retention in this video, specifically focusing on the methods to maintain one's guard successfully against an opponent's guard passing attempts. He first critically analyzes and challenges the conventional move-for-move method, in which one identifies the opponent's guard pass strategy then counters it with a specific response. Danaher then introduces a conceptual method where he suggests applying broad concepts and principles that can be effective against different types of guard passes, which reduces the necessity of identifying the specific pass your opponent is employing. He suggests that there are six fundamental requirements that an opponent must satisfy to pass the guard, and the player must focus on preventing these.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

WRIST CONTROL TO TRIANGLES - JOHN DANAHER

1m · John Danaher

In the video, instructor John Danaher explains the step-by-step process of executing the Wrist Control to Triangles submission from the guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He demonstrates how to control the opponent's wrist and efficiently transition to a triangle choke. He emphasizes the importance of the collar tie and how to wedge around your opponent's head and shoulders to lock in the figure four, creating an incapacitating strangulation.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

How to Pass Guards Quickly and Easily Using Leg Attacks by Craig Jones

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Craig Jones, a renown BJJ world champion, shares his expertise on the technique of using leg attacks to pass guards. Originating from Australia, Craig Jones has garnered accolades at high-profile championships such as EBI and ADCC, as well as Polaris Middleweight Champion. He emphasizes that his passing series, particularly this leg attack strategy, could significantly improve your guard passing performance. This series will not only advance your BJJ skills but also make the sport more enjoyable.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan Explains His Guard Passing System

6m · Gordon Ryan

This video features Gordon Ryan, a highly proficient no-gi grappler, presenting his innovative Guard Passing System. He introduces a well-structured system that he invented, combining three types of passing: loose pass, tight pass, and submission pass. Ryan thoroughly explains all three concepts and demonstrates how to seamlessly transition between them. He emphasizes the use of a unique leg pummeling technique, using heavy hands and light hips to efficiently manage opponent's legs while passing the guard. This specific guard passing strategy has been instrumental in Ryan's recent competitive success.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Smash Pass by Craig Jones

46s · Craig Jones

In this instructional video, Craig Jones demonstrates how to perform a smash pass from a base passing position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He first simulates a knee cut to elicit a predictable reaction from his opponent, which will then allow him to execute the smash pass. He also highlights the importance of pressuring the top leg during the pass and the use of the sprawl to establish control. The video is intended to help practitioners improve their guard passing skills.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Battle Tested Pressure Passing by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Bernardo Faria, a 5x black belt World Champion, teaches the techniques of his Battle-Tested Pressure Passing system. This system focuses on the Over/Under Pass, and according to Faria, does not require athleticism or strength. Instead, it relies on simple concepts and pressure. He assures that these methods can effectively deal with any guard style and can be especially helpful against flexible guard players.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Knee Lever Streight From Guard Pull - Breakdown

51s · Adam Wardzinski

In this instructional video, Adam Wardziński breaks down the technique for executing a knee lever straight from a guard pull. He begins by establishing a grip on his opponent's collar and arm, then pulls guard, being mindful to use the collar grip to drag the opponent downward to ensure he drops on his knee. With one leg acting as a hook on the opponent's shin, the other focuses on his knee, preventing him from opening his base. Wardziński then proceeds to lift his knee and perform the knee lever, demonstrating the technique's effectiveness in controlling and manipulating the opponent's posture.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Pulls

Gordon Ryan J Point Camping Guard Pass #bjj #jiujitsu #bjjwiki #bjjfanatics #bjjaddict

34s · DomoBJJ

The video showcases an instructional guide on how to execute the 'J-Point Camping Pass'. This technique, developed by John Daner, is demonstrated by BJJ athlete Gordon Ryan and utilized frequently in his game. The objective of the move is to exhaust the opponent by forcing them to carry your weight using their own frames and lower abdominal muscles. The tutorial emphasizes maintaining a low head position, driving weight into the opponent's opposite shoulder to flatten them out, keeping their feet off of you and flaring your right elbow to prevent a high leg activity. The implementation of this strategy leads to a successful guard passing, ending in side control.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Go Further Faster Bundle by John Danaher

$1297.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an advertisement for an 8-volume bundle by renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructor, John Danaher, titled Go Further, Faster. This wraparound series emphasizes learning basic Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu tactics, methods for preserving one's guard, and escaping from precarious positions. Students are educated about using strategies effectively when grappling within half guard, closed guard, and open guard. This content aims to deepen learners' understanding of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu and accelerates their progress in the martial art.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The BEST BJJ Passes For Beginners + COMMON MISTAKES | Gi & Nogi

9m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video provides a comprehensive tutorial on the four best passes for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu beginners, specifically focusing on the Torreando Pass and the Smash Pass. These passes are chosen for their low risk, high efficiency, and simplicity to learn. The coach Jordan gives step-by-step instructions on how to perform these passes correctly and highlights common mistakes that beginners often make. In addition, he offers tips on dealing with various defenses and emphasizes the importance of removing the guard player's grips to increase the success rate on the mats.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The PERFECT Darce Choke with Ruotolo Brothers

7m · Ruotolo Brothers

This video is an instructional BJJ video presented by the Ruotolo Brothers. The video demonstrates a detailed explanation on how to execute the perfect Darce Choke from the bottom guard position. The detailed instructions included teaching viewers how to maintain a proper guard, use their opponent's pressure against them for setup, control the opponent's wrist, sit up and drag the opponent's arm down to initiate the choke. The video also provided tips on how to increase the effectiveness of the Darce choke, how to create both pain and choking sensation and how to avoid common mistakes made while executing this move.

Technique: Darce Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Power Switch Guard Retention and Genius Back Takes by Mikey Musumeci

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, Mikey Musumeci, a renowned American Jiu Jitsu practitioner, teaches the Power Switch Guard Retention technique and back takes. He provides viewers with numerous strategies to improve their guard game and ensure their guard is never passed again in training or competition. In addition, Musumeci imparts techniques for successfully taking your opponent's back without having to rely on strength. The video caters to a wide range of skill and athletic levels, making it easy for anyone, regardless of age or gender, to learn.

Technique: Back Take Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Wrist Controls To Triangles by John Danaher

4m · John Danaher

In the video, John Danaher, one of the most well-known Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu instructors discusses and demonstrates how to execute a triangle choke from a guard position using wrist controls. He first criticizes the traditional method of executing a triangle choke using double wrist controls due to its lack of posture control. Instead, he advocates for using a single wrist control combined with a collar tie to maintain control over the opponent's posture. Danaher gives a detailed walkthrough of the technique, explaining how to get the necessary grips, when to split the legs, and how to finish the submission.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

Can't pass the guard? 🤔 Go for the ROLLING FRONT HEADLOCK! 🙂 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiu…

17s · Jordan

This instructional video by Jordan teaches transitions from the guard position using a technique known as the Rolling Front Headlock. The instructor explains that when having trouble passing the guard, one effective strategy can be to roll through, catch the opponent's chin, and hook their arm simultaneously. From this position, it's possible to transition to the guillotine or begin attacking Anaconda or DARS.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Transitions

Diamond Concept: The Diamond Guard Frame, Shield, Elegant, Pedal by Xande Ribeiro

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features Xande Ribeiro, an ADCC Champion and IBJJF Absolute World Champion, teaching his Diamond Concept. The Diamond Concept is a method for defending, escaping, and re-guarding against opponents in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) matches. Xande goes into detail about how this system can be used to reduce the pressure from an opponent and maintain guard position. The techniques described in this video are suitable for all levels, from beginners to black belts.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Ryan Hall - Defensive Guard, Strategy, Fundamentals, Building Walls, Sweeps & Submissons

19m · Ryan Hall

Ryan Hall presents the concept of viewing the guard as a position with multiple defensive walls where each wall has a unique set of tactics for defense and counter-fighting. The three layers of defense consist of the insteps or the ending of the feet, knees or outstretching hands, and elbows respectively. Ryan emphasizes that failing to hold off an opponent at one layer only means falling back to the next layer and continuing the fight. He also outlines the importance of using the proper range tools according to the closeness of the opponent.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Highly Effective Habits to Improve your Jiu Jitsu with Gordon Ryan and Garry Tonon

9m · Gordon Ryan

This YouTube video features Jiu-Jitsu icons Gordon Ryan and Garry Tonon as they unpack valuable habits to cultivate for effective BJJ performance. Ryan focuses on habit-building for guard passing, stressing the importance of flanking rather than aligning with the opponent and explains how to resist leg entanglement for guard passing dominance. Tonon, on the other hand, shares insights on late-stage guard retention, teaching viewers how to recover even when the opponent is closing the distance. Strategies shared include posting on the partner's shoulders, manipulating body exposure, and leveraging different recovery options that also create potential base points for submissions.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

The Fastest Way: To Become an Effective Guard Passer (No Gi) by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features BJJ expert, John Danaher teaching effective No-Gi guard passing strategies. Viewers are exposed to a variety of passing systems including toreandos, leg drags, scoop/reverse scoop passing, tripod passing, and body moves. John emphasizes on developing a systematic approach that simplifies the guard passing process but allows the flexibility to adapt to opponents during combat. The video is part of John Danaher's game-changing series, "The Fastest Way."

Technique: Toreando Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

5 Tips To Pass Any Guard No Gi by Lachlan Giles

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this YouTube video, Lachlan Giles provides five practical tips on passing the guard in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes controlling the shins rather than the knees, pushing away the opponent's feet instead of allowing them to contact his torso, and gaining "inside position" on the opponent's legs to prevent their escape. Additionally, he highlights the importance of upper body control and demonstrates a handy technique to win the "inside space" during hand fighting.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Here's how to finish off the straight ankle lock!

47s · Matt Arroyo

The video is a guide by Matt Arroyo on how to implement and complete a straight ankle lock, beginning with a fake guard pass. He emphasizes the importance of putting pressure on the opponent's leg to create the illusion of a guard pass, then swiftly transitioning to the ankle lock. He recommends using the "zip lock" motion and explains the key points, such as squeezing knees and using the elbow under the hip, for maintaining control and successfully executing the submission.

Technique: Straight Ankle Lock Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

The Fastest Way: To Develop An Unpassable Guard by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, a highly regarded figure in Jiu-Jitsu, delivers an 8-part instructional video on how to develop an unpassable guard. The tutorial covers understanding the issues of guard retention, learning 12 key body movements for maintaining the guard, and implementing various styles of guard retention against common passing strategies. He also discusses controlling the action over time, energy conservation, and how to regain control using guard retention techniques. The video also provides strategies to dismantle modern half guard passing systems.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Flexibility for BJJ - Ryan Hall Guard Flexibility Secrets

52m · Ryan Hall

In this video, Ryan Hall provides a detailed course on how to improve flexibility for better guard retention in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Hall highlights the importance of having a good stretching routine and the benefits it brings of being able to defend and frustrate opponents while maintaining guard effectively. He sequentially presents the various situations where flexibility plays a critical role, such as standing and ground positions, particularly during smash passes. He provides a comprehensive stretching routine to enhance these skills.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Learn THIS guard passing concept! 👊🏼 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

19s · Jordan

In this video, instructor Jordan teaches a strategy concept for passing one's guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The key principle, according to Jordan, is to keep the opponent's feet off the passer. The technique involves focusing on keeping the opponent's feet off and changing the angle of the frames. This principle applies to all types of guard passes.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

Guard Retention Anthology Bundle by Lachlan Giles & Ariel Tabak

$247.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is a promotional material for a 16-part instructional series on guard retention by BJJ champions Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak. They teach how to defend against various guard passes like knee cuts, half guard passes, smash passes, and headquarters position. The instructionals cover a variety of guard retention strategies and techniques, and they are accompanied by live rolling footage of the instructors demonstrating these concepts in the gym. The course claims to be one of the most comprehensive and detailed instructionals on guard retention.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

10 Tips To RAPIDLY Improve Your Guard Passing

10m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu provides 10 tips to rapidly improve your guard passing skills in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor explains concepts as well as physical techniques. For instance, he explains the importance of not stepping too close to the opponent's head to avoid giving them access to X-Guard, how to use the shin to consolidate the pass, and to minimize the amount of time spent on the knees unless the opponent's back is pinned to the mat. Additionally, the concept of strategically disengaging to re-engage is highlighted.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

DON'T try the soulder crunch unless you avoid this mistake (John Danaher) #bjjlesson #bjj

1m · John Danaher

John Danaher, a renowned BJJ instructor, explains an often misunderstood aspect of the Shoulder Crunch technique. He emphasizes that this movement is not about levering your opponent's head with your elbow, as many might think. Instead, he explains the importance of keeping the left elbow higher than the opponent's shoulder to prevent an easy escape. Lastly, he mentions how this technique's real strength comes from the feet and legs, with the goal being to sweep your opponent using your lower body strength, rather than attempting to overpower them with your elbow.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Sweeps

Pressure Passing Encyclopedia by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Instructor and 5x World Champion Bernardo Faria showcases his famous over/under passing technique in this instructional video. He emphasizes that success with his pressure passing system does not require significant athleticism, flexibility, strength, or skill. Highlighting its effectiveness, he has used this system against notable practitioners like Leandro Lo, Roberto "Cyborg" Abreu, and Erberth Santos. The video promotes that understanding and applying this system can significantly improve one's guard passing technique.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

A SIMPLE tip for ADVANCED Guard Retention - BJJ Analysis

11m · Less Impressed More Involved BJJ

This video by Less Impressed More Involved BJJ provides advanced guard retention tips, focusing on how to effectively use your near and far arms from half guard and open guard positions. The instructor breaks down the concepts behind self-framing and making connections, emphasizing the importance of managing distance and destabilizing opponents. The technique of self-framing is particularly stressed for situations in an open guard where the opponent is too far for an effective frame. Ultimately, the aim is to make guard retention easier and more effective through strategic movements and establishing robust connections.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

5 tips to improve your guard retention (Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak)

9m · Lachlan Giles

This video features BJJ practitioners Lachlan Giles and Ariel Tabak sharing five key tips to enhance your guard retention. The instructors explain the necessity of ensuring that your upper body always follows your lower body, keeping knees close to your chest, and incorporating a high pummel as an alternative to a traditional hip escape. They also stress the detrimental impact of reaching out legs and creating space during a guard position. The teachings aim to help viewers improve their guard game and make it more impervious to passes.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Systematically Attacking the Guard Body Lock Study by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, renowned grappler Gordon Ryan shares his comprehensive body lock system for successful guard passing. He delves into a range of techniques, such as front and side body locks, tight-waists, over-under body locks, high tripods and others, illustrating how to effectively break through the opponent's guard. He also introduces his "Golden Trilemma", a principle designed to create unstoppable passing threats. Additionally, Ryan offers breakdowns of his actual gym footage to demonstrate these techniques in action.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Defend the knee cut #bjj #jiujitsu

21s · Dubious Dom

This YouTube video by Dubious Dom provides three techniques to defend against the knee slice pass. The first technique involves using a collar grip and elbow escape. The second technique he demonstrates is an ankle pick. The final method is an inversion called the Kiss of the Dragon. Dom recommends using a reverse delihiva to make space and counter-attack.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The Science of Guard Retention: Understanding Jiu-Jitsu's most difficult concept

29m · Rixty Garami

The video tutorial, titled "The Science of Guard Retention", is instructed by Rixty Garami and focuses on the concept of maintaining the Guard position in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. It introduces the "Knowledge Denial Method," a technique for preventing your guard from being passed. The instructor goes through an in-depth analysis of different guard styles, the varying attributes of athletes, and the numerous options available while in the guard position. The video also highlights teaching methods for beginners, exemplifies the theory with case studies of renowned athletes, and discusses common mistakes and how to avoid them.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

No Gi Pressure Passing by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, 5x Black Belt World Champion Bernardo Faria teaches the No Gi Pressure Passing technique, specifically focusing on his infamous Over/Under Pass. Faria explains that this passing system does not require great athleticism, strength, or energy but relies heavily on proper pressure application. The viewers can expect to learn simple concepts to break any guard effortlessly and effectively counter flexible guard players.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

What Is Inside Position?.. The Most Important Concept In Jiujitsu | BJJ Theory

8m · Jordan

This video tutorial is a deep dive into the concept of 'Inside Position' by a BJJ instructor Jordan. The tutorial explains that inside position, the area between your knees, elbows, and torso, is crucial in both offense and defense in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The key to the dominant control and submission is to control the opponent's inside position while preventing them from breaching yours. Using the analogy of a car seat belt controlling a passenger to a grappler controlling an opponent, the tutorial highlights the idea that maximizing control over an opponent's inside position gives superior control over them.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

ARM BAR FROM GUARD - JOHN DANAHER

43s · John Danaher

In this video, instructor John Danaher details how to properly perform an armbar from guard position. He emphasizes the importance of bringing the opponent's arm to the center line, controlling their head, and obtaining what he calls a "top lock". Once the top lock is obtained, the goal is to pivot to an angle, bringing the leg over the opponent's head, and applying pressure. Finally, he instructs viewers on the option of finishing the submission from the bottom or switching to a top position.

Technique: Armbar Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

The Science of Guard Passing by Lucas Lepri

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide on the science of guard passing by Lucas Lepri. Lucas, a well-renowned competitor, shares his techniques and strategies to effectively diagnose and dismantle any guard, both in the gym and in competition. Viewers would gain an entirely new perspective on grappling that would transform their entire game. Lucas’s techniques are renowned for making even the best competitors seem like white belts.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

5 armbars you should know from guard by Love Judo Magazine and Matt D’Aquino

3m · Matt D'Aquino

In this video, Matt D'Aquino, a Judo Olympian and BJJ black belt, demonstrates five armbar techniques from the guard position. He explains important concepts such as grip style, the importance of blocking the opponent's hip, and using your hip movement rather than arm strength to execute the submission. He focuses on different situations such as when an opponent's hand is on the ground, on your pants, or on your gi, and provides clear instruction on how to transition into the armbar submission. Matt also emphasizes the key mistakes to avoid in each situation.

Technique: Armbar Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

How to Frame to Prevent Guard Pass - Andre Galvao

25m · Andre Galvao

In this YouTube video, Andre Galvao, a multiple-time world & ADCC champion, explains how to frame effectively to prevent a Guard Pass in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He discusses two main ways to recover the guard when an opponent takes a side position, either turning towards or away from the opponent. The technique involves strategic use of the elbow on the floor for leverage and protection of space through framing. Andre Galvao emphasizes the importance of hip movement and the role of the top leg in crafting this defense against a guard pass.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Systematically Attacking The Guard 2.0 by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, several-time ADCC champion, Gordon Ryan, teaches his unique high-stepping method for effectively passing stubborn guards such as the Reverse De La Riva, De La Riva, and Ashi Garami. Gordon shares his methodology and offers advice on how to apply this system to revolutionize your guard passing game. He emphasizes the potency of the flanking position and the importance of strategically weaponizing the j point. Viewers also get to see this system in action through actual gym footage, broken down by Gordon for a clearer understanding of the moves.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Guard Retention: The Complete Guide

10m · Jon Thomas

This video by Jon Thomas, targeted towards Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu enthusiasts, provides coverage on the major concepts of guard retention. The necessity to keep opponents in alignment with their hips is emphasized, along with the use of the outside leg and the arms to recenter. He also discusses the concept of protecting the elbow knee space and using the elbow frame to center the hip. Ultimately, these techniques aim to prevent the guard from being passed by the opponent. The video is instructional in nature and lasts around eleven minutes.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Lucas Lepri's Guard Passing System is a thing of Beauty - BJJ Study

14m · Lucas Lepri

The video is a detailed breakdown of Lucas Lepri's guard passing technique, focusing specifically on the knee cut. Lepri's approach to passing the knee shield and managing the pummeling of the legs is particularly analyzed. The video explores Lepri's success in fluidly adapting to opponents' defensive movements and turning these to his advantage, enabling him to safely pass the guard on multiple occasions. The video seeks to inform viewers about the effectiveness of Lepri's guard passing strategy and inspire them to adopt similar approaches in their own BJJ practice.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The Catch Wrestling Formula by Neil Melanson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a guard retention tutorial taught by Neil Melanson. He shares the advanced guard game secrets that have made him a successful coach in MMA. Viewers are shown detailed, thorough and efficient techniques that will help immensely in gym training and in competition. His unorthodox, yet highly effective strategy is specifically designed to trump opponent's defensive strategies.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

8 Reasons Why Your BJJ Guard Retention Sucks (And How to Fix It)

20m · Chewjitsu

In this YouTube video, Chewjitsu shares lessons to help improve one's Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) Guard Retention skills. He talks about his own struggles with Guard Retention as someone who transitioned from wrestling to BJJ and shares advice based on his experiences. The specific tips Chewjitsu gives are aimed at helping viewers understand where they may be going wrong and how to correct those mistakes to bolster their guard retention defence. His advice includes not giving up the inside position of the arm, understanding when to resist and when to go with the flow, and other tactical and strategic insights.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

How Mikey Musumeci Got The Fastest Submission In The History Of The IBJJF World's Black B…

14m · Mikey Musumeci

The video breaks down the fastest submission in the history of the IBJJF World's Black Belt finals performed by Mikey Musumeci. Mikey talks about his method of applying the straight foot lock submission, focusing specifically on the control points and angles needed for efficient execution. He emphasizes the significance of attacking the weaker parts of the foot and shares insights on how to immobilize the opponent's leg. He further demonstrates the exact movement from the double pull position that led to his record-breaking submission.

Technique: Straight Ankle Lock Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

How To Beat Bigger Guys: Guard by Bruno Malfacine

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Bruno Malfacine, a highly accomplished and renowned BJJ fighter, teaching viewers techniques on how to use the guard position effectively against larger opponents. Malfacine uses his own competitive career as an example, demonstrating his successful methods for sweeping and submitting opponents who are significantly larger than him. He assures viewers that these techniques are not just specific to him, but can be applied by anyone in similar situations.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Understanding Guard Passing: Concepts & Heuristics (Lachlan Giles)

31m · Lachlan Giles

In this instructional video, BJJ black belt Lachlan Giles explains various concepts and strategies for guard passing. He starts by discussing the importance of directing your opponent's attention away from your actions and working through positions of high stability, which he refers to as "staging positions." He goes on to explain how to single-side the opponent's hips to limit their defensive options, misdirect their frames to overcome defensive barriers, and work through layers of the guard. The concepts discussed in the video are fundamental in nature and apply to various techniques for passing the guard.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Concepts/Strategy

Understanding Guard Retention From The Most Important Positions In Jiu Jitsu No Gi by Gor…

10m · Gordon Ryan

Gordon Ryan delivers an instructional video breaking down guard retention concepts in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) from key positions. Ryan talks about the challenges of teaching guard retention due to the vast number of scenarios, but he presents a robust conceptual approach which he then applies to specific situations. This involves dividing guard retention against loose passing and tight passing, each with distinct goals and strategies. Ryan emphasises how important is to immediately transition from defensive guard retention to launching your own attacks. He also discusses double unders and over under passes, explaining how to counter these techniques effectively.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

The Leg Pin Passing System by Kade & Tye Ruotolo

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Kade and Tye Ruotolo teaching their unique Leg Pin Passing System. They highlight the versatility of the Leg Pin Pass and demonstrate how it can connect to other passes for a continuous and unstoppable flow. Through their instructions, the viewer can develop a relentless passing rhythm that poses constant threats to their opponent. They aim to turn anyone into a "passing machine" with their method.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Key Guard Retention CONCEPTS | BJJ Gi Drilling

8m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

This video posted by Jordan Teaches Jiu-Jitsu focuses on the key Concepts of Guard Retention in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, emphasizing the roles of grips and multiple points of connection. Jordan explains the importance of maintaining a strong guard, and how to use your hands, feet, and frames to prevent the opponent from passing your guard. He demonstrates several transitions between various types of guard (like De La Riva, reverse De La Riva), showing how to keep connection with the opponent using foot grips. Jordan illustrates these concepts with clear examples and practical applications taken from drilling sessions.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Knee Cut to Leg Drag with Levi Jones Leary and Lachlan Giles

6m · Levi Jones-Leary

Levi Jones Leary, with input from Lachlan Giles, demonstrates how to smoothly transition from a knee cut to a leg drag guard pass. Levi starts with the basics of a knee cut, emphasizing the importance of not giving your opponent the reverse Dela Riva hook. If the knee cut is impossible due to a strong knee shield or the opponent facing his hips towards you, Levi shows how to retract and transition into leg drag. This is achieved by bringing your weight back, extending the opponent's leg, hopping over their shin, and finally stepping over to establish a strong leg drag position. Note there are repeated demonstrations of the technique along with strategies to address the common issues faced.

Technique: Knee Cut Pass Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

The Grilled Chicken Guard Retention System by Priit Mihkelson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features instruction by Priit Mihkelson on his unique 'Grilled Chicken Guard Retention System'. The system is designed for older grapplers who may not have the physical attributes of younger participants, offering an easy-to-learn and effective way to retain guard. Mihkelson's approach is fundamental and no-nonsense, developed from his personal everyday use. The video promises viewers they will never fear playing guard again when faced with younger, faster and explosive opponents.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Which style of guard do you play? The pros and cons (Lachlan Giles)

15m · Lachlan Giles

The video features BJJ instructor Lachlan Giles giving an in-depth breakdown of various styles of guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, with a focus on how the position of the legs (inside, outside, or one in one out) affects the effectiveness and congruency of the guard. He gives pros and cons of each style, explaining how the leg position impacts available attacks, defense, and transitions into leg entanglements. Lachlan emphasizes the importance of understanding these concepts to structure an effective and congruent guard game. He also briefly addresses how these positions can apply to MMA.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

You've got to learn this TRIANGLE CHOKE setup in the gi❗ 🥋

22s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

In this instructional video, the instructor from "Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu" demonstrates a triangle choke setup from the guard position. He shares his favorite setup for a triangle choke in the gi, which involves a scissor sweep-like movement. Rather than going underneath his opponent's arm during the move, he does it over top and pushes the arm to break the grip. The setup concludes by circling the leg over the opponent's neck to lock up the triangle choke.

Technique: Triangle Choke Position: Guard Generic Category: Submissions

The Stack Pass by Andre Galvao

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Black Belt World Champion Andre Galvao shares his knowledge on performing the safest and most effective stack pass, which is his pass of choice. He thoroughly explains the fundamentals of how to get into and win the position, making it a viable technique for any BJJ practitioner. The four-volume instructional series provides in-depth learning about the entries, variations, and finishes for the stack pass, allowing viewers to pressure around the guard successfully.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Passing

Top 10 BJJ Sweeps Every Beginner Should Know #jiujitsu #martialarts #bjj

42s · Tony Casarez

The video by Tony Casarez is an instructional guide on the top 10 Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) sweeps every beginner should know. The techniques range from close guard to spider guard to open guard. The video emphasizes understanding the principles of leverage, allowing the practitioner to focus on finesse and timing as opposed to brute strength and power. It encourages creativity while in your guard and provides multiple options to ensure an effective sweep.

Technique: Sweep Systems Position: Guard Generic Category: Sweeps

A Much More Powerful Alternative to Hip Escapes by Ryan Hall

13m · Ryan Hall

In this YouTube video, Ryan Hall showcases alternative techniques for Hip Escapes in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He begins by explaining the typical issues he sees with most practitioners' implementation of the Hip Escape (Shrimp) technique. Ryan emphasizes that leverage and power in BJJ come from the floor, and the hip escape, if executed incorrectly, can hamper the practitioner's power and base. Hall proposes modifications of the hip escape action to ensure better availability of strength, balance, and counter techniques while preventing opponents from exploiting the position.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Escapes

The guard Retention Anthology: Around and Under by Lachlan Giles & Ariel Tabak

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Summary: This instructional video, part of an 8-part series, features ADCC medalist Lachlan Giles and black belt Ariel Tabak teaching the art of guard retention. They teach strategies and techniques aimed at helping practitioners defend against torreandos, stack passes, leg drags, and more. Viewers will learn tips on how to maintain the guard, improve positions, and get back on the attack. The video includes live rolling footage showing these techniques being applied against other grapplers.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Simple Trick for Advanced Guard Retention - AIGA BJJ Analysis

17m · Not Mapped

The video focuses on the subject of guard retention and the use of self frames—a technique used to create space and protect oneself while in a guard position. It provides a deep analysis of the match between Jozef Chen and Izaak Michell, illustrating how to use the concept of self frames in both the seated and supine (lying face up) guard positions. It defines the "golden rule" of guard retention and discusses the interplay between various guard positions. The instructor uses these concepts to study and interpret the strategies used in competitive matches.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Who says white belts shouldn’t do leg locks?🔥

49s · Matt Arroyo

The video features instructor Matt Arroyo discussing the safety and appropriateness of various leg locks for white belts in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He explains the differences between typical heel hooks and straight ankle locks, particularly noting the differences in pain and potential for injury. He suggests that straight ankle locks, which produce severe pain before causing a potential injury, are safer and more suitable for white belts. The video concludes with Matt Arroyo asking viewers for their own opinions on which leg locks white belts should be practicing.

Technique: Straight Ankle Lock Position: Guard Generic Category: Leg Locks

Under Pressure: Retention, Recovery and Attacking From Guard by Brian Glick

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Brian Glick teaches a technique known as 'The Clamp' designed for effective guard retention. Glick explains how to use The Clamp to improve both offense and defense maneuvers. This technique can be used to control the distance between you and your opponent. The video is an encompassing tool for enhancing escape, guard retention, reversals, and submission strategies. It is suitable for both beginners and seasoned practitioners of BJJ.

Position: Guard Generic Category: Guard Retention

Powerful half guard sweep! #bjj

27s · Not Mapped

In the video, the instructor demonstrates a powerful half guard sweep technique. The technique begins from a half guard position, with the top leg in a low knee shield right at the opponent's hips, and both hands on the mat. Despite appearing exposed, the knee shield prevents the opponent from gaining back control. The sweep is then executed by walking the hands backwards, causing the opponent to fall as they lean into the practitioner, ultimately resulting in landing in the opponent's half guard.

Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

The JOHN WAYNE Sweep! 🥋 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

19s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The YouTube video by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu instructs on executing a technique known as the John Wayne Sweep from the Half Guard position. The instructor demonstrates the steps, which involve grabbing the opponent's wrist, bridging to load their weight onto your hips, and then rolling them over. The instructor emphasizes that the key to this sweep is the proper positioning and timing.

Technique: John Wayne Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

The Half Guard Anthology by Lachlan Giles

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide by Lachlan Giles, an ADCC Veteran and renowned BJJ coach, introducing his half guard strategy for Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. The content covers techniques to manipulate opponents from half guard using their weight against them, detailed instructions to sweep and submit from half guard. The guide, with over 10 hours of content, also reveals Lachlan's trade secrets to mastering the half guard game.

Technique: Sweep-to-Submission Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Build The Perfect Half Guard Game by John Danaher

27m · John Danaher

In this instructional video, John Danaher shows how to effectively build a half guard game. He discusses the significance of the half guard position from both a defensive and offensive perspective, highlighting how athletes can either use it as their main sweeping technique or a primary passing position. The underlying aspect to keep in mind, according to Danaher, is the control or lack of control of the head and shoulders of the bottom player, which determines the success of the half guard game. He emphasized the importance of protecting the head and shoulders from the opponent to effectively utilize the half guard position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

How to pass the half guard!

52s · Matt Arroyo

The video is an instructional by Matt Arroyo on passing the half guard using the Twisted Half Guard Pass. He explains how to effectively control your opponent's leg and gradually work your foot free from the guard. He emphasizes on maintaining body balance and leg control even after freeing your leg to forestall opponent's reversal. More techniques and details can be found on his website.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Half Guard: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the video, world-renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu coach, John Danaher, provides an in-depth tutorial on Half Guard techniques as part of his Go Further, Faster Fundamentals series. This comprehensive module focuses on the central principles and strategies around Half Guard, including off-balances, sweeps, and back takes. Throughout the over eight hours of content, Danaher shares his expertise to help viewers improve their guard retention skills in BJJ.

Technique: Back Take Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Stop getting SMASHED in Half Guard 🙏 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

19s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The YouTube video provides an instructional on how to prevent getting smashed while in half guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor Jordan elaborately explains and demonstrates how to utilize a butterfly hook to regain frames against an opponent. He teaches viewers how to insert this butterfly hook into the opponent's thigh, use it to rock them sideways then as they return, positions the hand onto their hip to flip the frame back in front. The lesson ends with a suggestion to start attacking with butterfly sweeps.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

All About Jiu Jitsu Half Guard No Gi by Gordon Ryan

12m · Gordon Ryan

In the video, Bernardo Faria interviews Gordon Ryan about his preferred half guard strategies when in a NoGi match. Ryan emphasizes the need for a comprehensive guard game, explaining that a successful half guard player needs to also be proficient in open guard, sumo guard, and leg lock game among other things. He demonstrates techniques to elevate from a half guard, present dilemmas for the top player from a knee shield half guard, and how to transition to attacking positions from a deep half guard. He emphasizes that the bigger picture is to interconnect various guard systems starting from a half guard position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

The Guard Passing Anthology: Half Guard by Lachlan Giles

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The instructional video by Lachlan Giles covers the techniques of passing half guard. He offers more than 10 hours of educational content which aims to dramatically elevate the BJJ game of the viewer. The course also explores how to manipulate the opponent from the half guard, use their weight against them for passing, and techniques for mounting and taking the back from half guard. The sheer length and extensive detail ensure a comprehensive understanding of all the secrets to half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

This Ruotolo brothers trick to avoid half-guard passing is so strong it’s available on Ju…

1m · Not Mapped

The video from Tristar Gym provides a technique on escaping from half-guard position. The instructor emphasizes the use of a knee shield as the first defence but also demonstrates going to the opponent's wrists when the knee shield fails. After propping up to the elbow while lifting the hand up to avoid being trapped, he shows a transition to one knee, windmilling the arm and applying a whizzer, then performing a hip heist and establishing a headlock to shift from a bottom to a top position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Escapes

Half Guard Kimura Series - As Seen on EBI 5 (Lachlan Giles)

9m · Lachlan Giles

This video is a detailed instructional by Lachlan Giles on the Half Guard Kimura Series, which he used in competition at EBI 5. Lachlan firstly delves into the importance of maintaining pressure on the opponent's wrist and hip to prevent them from achieving an armbar, even when they pass guard. He then demonstrates various strategies when the opponent is outside the legs, including a north-south approach, armbars, back takes, and jumps over the head. This variety of techniques creates an expansive "Kimura trap" system.

Technique: Kimura Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

The Battle Tested Half Guard by Bernardo Faria

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features 5x world champion Bernardo Faria sharing his battle-tested half guard strategies. He focuses specifically on sweeps from this position, using his unique and effective system. Faria's techniques are designed to give viewers a new perspective on Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, with methods proven to work at the highest levels of competition. This system is intended to be easy to use and effective against various opponents, with the goal of transforming the viewer's BJJ game.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Craig Jones - Z-Half Guard Choi Bar / Arm Saddle Armbar (Bringing Leg Over The Head)

4m · Craig Jones

The video provides a tutorial on how to execute an armbar from the Z-Half Guard position. Instructor Craig Jones demonstrates the technique, explaining each step in detail. He starts by setting up the position, maintaining a critical grip on the opponent's shoulder, and uses a butterfly grip to secure the set-up. He explains the necessary momentum and tactical steps to ensure successful submission. The video is instructional and contains BJJ content.

Technique: Armbar Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

BJJ Technique - Octopus Half Guard Attacks - Coach Zahabi

12m · Firas Zahabi

The video provides instruction on how to execute attacks from the 'Octopus Half Guard' position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). Coach Zahabi explains and demonstrates techniques such as the hip bump sweep and taking the back from the Octopus Half Guard when the opponent tries to pass or counter. Moreover, he highlights the importance of going "negative," or facing the same direction as your opponent, in response to the opponent attempting to pass in the negative direction. Lastly, he points out the effectiveness and simple nature of these techniques, asserting them as the only three needed from this position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Half Domination by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features instructor Tom DeBlass teaching a technique he calls Half Domination, which focuses on the half guard position. The course instructs viewers on strategies to control and dominate the half guard, with the aim of outmaneuvering opponents. He discusses key principles to stagnate even the most dynamic grapplers and emphasizes techniques of simplifying and slowing down the game. He is also the coach of the renowned grappler, Garry Tonon.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Beat The Step Over in BJJ by Craig Jones

2m · Craig Jones

In this video, Craig Jones instructs on how to prevent an opponent from executing a step over in a half guard situation in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, thus helping in guard retention. He gives a detailed explanation on how this can be achieved with techniques that involve using butterfly hooks and codo hooks. The techniques are meant to immobilize or trap the opponent's foot, thereby preventing them from tucking inside, stepping over, or taking control of your back. The video focuses on the importance of being active and strategic with your legs to maintain guard and avoid losing position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

GO BASIC! Lockdown Half Guard Fundamental sweeps

6m · Mike Palladino

In this video, instructor Mike Palladino demonstrates three fundamental sweeps from the Lockdown Half Guard position. The three sweeps are "Old School," "Plan B," and "Electric Chair." He covers the importance of the underhook, proper foot positioning for the lockdown, and details the steps to perform each sweep. He also provides troubleshooting tips for common issues that may arise during these sweeps.

Technique: Fundamental Sweeps Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

New Wave Jiu Jitsu: No Gi Half Guard 3 Directions of Attack by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a comprehensive instruction on the no-gi half guard and its three directions of attack taught by renowned BJJ instructor, John Danaher. He delves into the concept and strategy of this favored position, demonstrating how to maintain half guard against heavy pressure and how to transition back to offense. Techniques like tight waists, single legs, body locks, knee shields, deep half, scorpions and knee levers are merged into a system for mastering the half guard. The video is part of an 8-volume series.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

How To Build The Perfect Half Guard Game For No Gi by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

The video features John Danaher giving an in depth explanation on how to use half guard effectively particularly in No-Gi. He highlights the main differences between Gi and No-Gi and how grip plays a crucial role, providing advice on how to adjust strategies for bottom half guard. He contends a well-executed half guard is advantageous for both the top and the bottom positions, underpinning this strategy with an understanding of the relationship between the opponent's outside shoulder and hip. He further explains the importance of keeping the shoulder off the mat and making good use of the underhook.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

AMAZING Attack Options from Bottom Half guard - Ruotolo Brothers

7m · Ruotolo Brothers

The YouTube instructional video features the Ruotolo Brothers demonstrating attack options from the bottom half guard position. They illustrate an overhook technique that leverages the opponent's pressure against them, allowing the practitioner to transition into a guillotine or armlock. The instructors emphasize how the technique can be a game changer, especially when it's beginning to look like the opponent is close to passing the guard. Numerous options are discussed including different finishing techniques and strategies based on the opponent's reactions.

Technique: Guillotine Choke Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

Systematically Attacking From Half Guard by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is a comprehensive guide on how to control and attack from the Half Guard position by Gordon Ryan, an ADCC Absolute Champion. Ryan delves into his preferred Half Guard configurations such as knee shields, half butterfly, and deep half, and explains the techniques, strategies and combinations that he has perfected for no-gi grappling. Moreover, he shows how to effectively pummel and grip in a no-gi context using underhooks, cross shoulder posts and more. The video also includes live rolling footage, broken down in real-time by Ryan, which gives a hands-on demonstration of the system in action.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Buggy Choke Developed By Ralph Gracie Team Member Austin Hardt

3m · Austin Hardt

Austin Hardt from the Ralph Gracie Team demonstrates the Buggy Choke technique. Austin explains that the choke is typically initiated from under half guard or side control positions. He provides detailed instructions on creating space, applying leverage, and maintaining control to successfully apply the choke. Austin also shows both normal and inverse variations of the Buggy Choke, including adaptations based on the opponent's reactions.

Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Half Guard Passing by John Danaher

22m · John Danaher

The YouTube video features renowned BJJ instructor John Danaher teaching the art of perfect Jiu Jitsu half guard passing. Danaher starts by explaining the difference between conventional guard passing and half guard passing, highlighting that the half guard strategy is a drastically different approach to bypassing the opponent's guard. In this approach, he emphasises upon the control of the opponent's head, which contrasts with the common focus on controlling the hips in traditional guard passing. He introduces a key movement called the 'cranial shift', which involves switching the focus from the opponent's hips to their head. The video is essentially a tutorial on this half guard passing technique.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Coyote Half Guard by Lucas Leite

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video showcases Lucas Leite's signature Coyote Half Guard. Lucas is a world champion black belt known for effectively using this technique against opponents of all sizes, even intentionally competing in ultra-heavy divisions. This video is designed to elevate your half guard game and transform your defensive capabilities on the mat.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

6 approaches to passing the knee shield (Lachlan Giles)

8m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles, a notable BJJ black belt, demonstrates six approaches to passing the knee shield while in half guard. Giles emphasizes the importance of forethought and prevention in dealing with the knee shield, suggesting to ideally block the knee shield before it fully forms. The video goes on to cover various techniques such as walking back to center, pushing the hip or foot, and swinging the hips in front of the leg for successful guard passing strategies against the knee shield. All these strategies are explained with detailed steps and practical tips for when these approaches would be most effective during a BJJ match.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan Half Guard Pass

51s · Not Mapped

The YouTube video teaches about the technique to pass half guard like Gordon Ryan. Firstly, Ryan attempts to flatten his opponent through a cross face and an underhook. Faced with resistance, he wiggles his arm around until gaining the cross face grip, then reaches for his opponent's armpit for further control. To secure the underhook, he threatens sliding into mount, which prompts a pushback by his opponent, giving the space needed for the underhook. The video discusses the importance of butterfly grip and its execution to control and constrict space. Finally, Ryan tripods up and uses his instep to slide directly into mount.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Half Guard Passing and Dynamic Pins: BJJ Fundamentals - Go Further Faster by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher, renowned Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu coach, instructs the viewer on how to pass half guard and apply dynamic pins in this instructional video. He emphasizes the importance of transitioning efficiently from one pin to the next while maintaining control. The video is part of Danaher's "Go Further, Faster" series, designed to help BJJ students of all levels improve rapidly.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

5 tips for an IMPASSABLE Half Guard 🔥🥋 #bjj #brazilianjiujitsu #jiujitsu

1m · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

In the video, Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu provides five tips to reinforce a half-guard position and prevent an opponent from passing through the guard. The first two tips include using a knee shield with both the top and bottom legs to stop chest-to-chest contact. The third tip advises to maintain a T-Rex arm position to prevent head grabs or underhooks by the opponent. The fourth and fifth tips involve allowing underhooks while simultaneously averting a head grab, and using a bottom knee and butterfly hook for counter-attacks.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Choi Bar from half guard #bjj #jiujitsu

42s · Not Mapped

The video tutorial demonstrates how to effectively execute a Choi Bar from the half guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). The technique is set up from a half butterfly position where the instructor baits his opponent for a free arm bar. The instructor walks through the technique steps, which include the placement of the arm, the framing of the face, a hip escape to bring the knee inside, flaring of the knee, and the final movement of the arm bar. The instructor emphasizes the importance of correct hand and leg positioning during the technique's execution.

Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

The No Gi Deep Half Guard 2.0 by Jeff Glover

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is an instructional guide on the No Gi Deep Half Guard 2.0 technique by Jeff Glover. Jeff elaborates on the significance and underappreciation of Deep Half Guard, focusing on its potential for enabling sweeps and submissions even for less agile grapplers. He explains how to convert any unfavorable situation into a Deep Half Guard escape or sweep and introduces his unique "Reptilian" method for countering the dreaded underhook. The video emphasizes practical drills and provides a fresh perspective on the Deep Half Guard position.

Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

How Catch Wrestling Wrecks The Half Guard by Neil Melanson

14m · Neil Melanson

In this instructional video, Neil Melanson teaches how to use catch wrestling to counter an opponent's half guard. He specifically illustrates how to use a "wizard" technique to maintain control and consistently disrupt the opponent's position, thus preventing them from executing desirable scrambles or moves. Following the wizard, Melanson transitions into a "Quarter Nelson" and then into a "Darce choke." Throughout the explanation, he emphasizes the importance of understanding positioning, control, and the difference in pushing and pulling forces when applying these techniques.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Choi Bar From Half Guard by Yongwon Choi

1m · Yongwon Choi

The video features instructor Yongwon Choi, who teaches the Choi Bar technique from the half guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He first suggests making space by bumping against the opponent. Then, he instructs placing the right arm below the opponent's chin and bumping again to further create space. He emphasizes applying a shoulder crunch and pushing the opponent's head away before transitioning the right leg over the opponent's head. Finally, he advises keeping the opponent's shoulder against the chest while moving to the right.

Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

Systematically Attacking The Guard: Half Guard Passing by Gordon Ryan

$349.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Gordon Ryan, multiple-time ADCC champion, teaching his half guard passing system, specifically how to systematically attack different kinds of half guards like knee shield, butterfly, lockdown, and deep half guard. This system is optimized for all forms of grappling including no-gi, gi, and MMA. Additional footage of Gordon demonstrating these techniques during rolling in the gym is included, which he further analyzes for thorough understanding. This is an in-depth and comprehensive guide to mastering half guard passing.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

GOAT METHOD for PASSING HALF GUARD EVERYONE SHOULD KNOW!!!

57s · Not Mapped

The video focuses on a technique for passing a half guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor presents a principle he credits to Gordon Ryan. Firstly, he advises against keeping the knee on the floor since it allows the opponent to off-balance you. Instead, he recommends keeping the right knee jammed into the opponent's hip and lifting the left knee outside the opponent's hip. The instructor also emphasizes the importance of switching from an open hip to a closed hip when going to a tripod to free the leg before passing the guard.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan - Body Lock Guard Pass Off Their Underhook

3m · Gordon Ryan

The YouTube video hosted by BJJ Fanatics features the world-famous Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu practitioner Gordon Ryan demonstrating a body lock guard pass from half guard when the opponent manages to get an underhook. Ryan stresses on the importance of maintaining a body lock to control the opponent's upper body, and using a butterfly hook to control the space between the opponent's knees. As a result, the practitioner is more likely to be successful in passing the guard and obtaining a secure top side control position.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Under Pressure: Half Butterfly Mastery by Brian Glick

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Brian Glick, a highly regarded BJJ Black Belt, in his instructional video titled 'Under Pressure: Half Butterfly Mastery', imparts extensive knowledge on the highly effective yet underutilized half butterfly guard. The video provides systematic approaches to mastering this guard, making it easy for both beginners and experienced jiu-jitsu practitioners. Brian stresses that the half butterfly guard can be developed into a highly competitive guard with minimal athleticism and effort, thus diversifying your game strategy. He takes inspiration from his teacher, John Danaher, in his instructing approach.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Baseball Choke Bottom Half Guard #bjj #jiujitsu #brazilianjiujitsu #friscotx #friscotexas…

53s · Robert Thomas

This instructional video features Robert Thomas, a brown belt, demonstrating the baseball choke from the bottom half guard position. Thomas advises to initially use a top frame for defense, then transition into the setup for the choke by pulling out the opponent's collar and securing a deep grip. He suggests allowing the opponent to pass your guard, then executing the choke by turning. Thomas highlights the importance of a deep grip on the collar to ascertain a successful submission.

Position: Half Guard Category: Submissions

How to Pass a Knee Shield

55s · Josh Saunders

In this YouTube video, jiu-jitsu instructor Josh Saunders explains two different techniques for passing an opponent's knee shield, a common defensive position in BJJ. The first technique involves using a hip wedge to turn the opponent's knees toward the ceiling, followed by bringing the right knee to the floor and landing chest-to-chest with a cross face. The second technique is useful when the opponent is facing towards you. It involves reaching over the back, connecting the right knee and elbow, and extending the opponent's leg away from their chest to establish control. He also provides a secret tip: the knee of the one passing should stay on the floor to minimize the distance between your hip and the opponent's knee.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Down Right Sloppy Half Butterfly by Eoghan O'Flanagan

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the video, Eoghan O'Flanagan, an ADCC veteran, teaches viewers how to build a complete gameplan from the half butterfly guard position. He provides a step-by-step explanation of techniques and strategies necessary for effective use of the half butterfly guard. Detailed instruction is given on effective maneuvers and countermoves, with specific tips on how to retain the guard against various opposing techniques.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Knee Shield VS Bigger Opponents by Mikey Musumeci

1m · Mikey Musumeci

This video, led by Mikey Musumeci, provides an overview of utilizing the knee shield position when faced with a larger opponent in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Mikey instructs on how to effectively maintain control and defend against weight distribution by employing framing techniques using the knee and hand, as well as making strategic grips like the cross-collar and 'pillow grip.' He demonstrates a transition from controlling his opponent's knee to attempting a footlock, highlighting the concept of redirecting the opponent's weight and removing their leg for successful guard retention.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

3 Very Efficient Sweeps From Deep Half Guard by Leonardo Nogueira

9m · Leonardo Nogueira

In this video, Leonardo Nogueira demonstrates three effective sweeps from the deep half guard position. He begins by discussing the importance of creating an uncomfortable situation for the top player and detailing how to properly control the opponent's waist. The techniques covered rely on the opponent's reactions, using their movements to dictate which sweep is applied. Nogueira includes details on grip changes to adjust for the opponent's base and potential counters.

Technique: Sweep Systems Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older or Less Athletic - Top Game No Gi by John Da…

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instruction video is part of "Ageless Jiu Jitsu: Winning When You're Older or Less Athletic" course by renowned coach John Danaher. In this video, he teaches strategies on how to overcome younger, more athletic opponents using technique rather than athleticism. He specifically discusses passing from the half guard position, offering detailed tips on maximizing connection to control opponents. Furthermore, he introduces his dynamic pinning system designed to exhaust more athletic adversaries while conserving the practitioner's energy. He also provides tools and techniques specifically optimised for older grapplers.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

Gordon Ryan - Forcing Half Guard

38s · Gordon Ryan

This video shows Gordon Ryan teaching how to force the half guard in a Brazilian Jiu Jitsu match. The major emphasis is on ensuring that you implement the half guard on your terms. The technique involves employing a chest to chest approach. From this secured position, the opponent's reactions can be controlled, allowing for a more effortless pass.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Body Lock Pass: Standard version

5m · Lachlan Giles

This video features instructor Lachlan Giles demonstrating the steps of a body lock pass from the half guard position. He emphasizes preventing the opponent's leg from reaching the outside, using an underhook and one's own body positioning to block the opponent's leg, and shifting the opponent's hips to the side to improve positioning. After achieving the body lock, the instructor demonstrates how to step over the opponent's leg, shift hips and shoulder position, and eventually move into side control or mount as the situation allows. He also covers common defenses the opponent might use and how to counter them.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Buchecha Half Guard by Marcus "Buchecha" Almeida

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Marcus "Buchecha" Almeida demonstrating his signature Buchecha Half Guard technique. As an 11-time IBJJF Champion, Buchecha shares his unique half guard system and shows how it can be effective against opponents of all sizes and strengths. There's also gym footage of Buchecha demonstrating these techniques in practice to further illustrate their effectiveness and transferability to real BJJ scenarios.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Dean Lister's Bottom Half Guard System (Full BJJ Instructional)

35m · Dean Lister

This video features BJJ black belt Dean Lister offering an instructional on his system for executing a variety of techniques from the bottom half guard position, including the "shove by" sweep amongst others. Lister emphasizes the importance of choosing a favorite side to learn and master half guard. He discusses different scenarios, positions, and submissions you can execute from half guard. He further demonstrates the importance of having a fight functional half guard, giving viewers a detailed and clear guide to enhance their BJJ game.

Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

EASIEST Half Guard Sweep To Learn 🧠 #ajj #jiujitsu

34s · Keenan Cornelius

The video is a brief tutorial by Keenan Cornelius on a basic sweep technique from the half guard position. Keenan emphasizes on effectively controlling the opponent’s movements by using lapel grip and underhook position. He explains a strategy to maneuver your opponent's foot by switching your feet position, thus allowing room to create a sweeping motion. He then illustrates how to catch the opponent off balance by pressuring them to resist back, allowing the sweep to be executed more efficiently.

Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

Master The Move: Arm Drags by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, John Danaher, a renowned BJJ coach, provides a comprehensive guide on how to execute Arm Drags from the Half Butterfly position. The technique is presented from various angles, along with its application and execution. It covers how to perform Arm Drags from different positions such as supine, seated, standing, and how to use it defensively. It's an in-depth course designed for those looking to enhance their grappling game.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Simple X GUARD entry from HALF GUARD 🔥 #brazilianjiujitsu #bjj #jiujitsu

21s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video is an instructional guide by Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu on how to transition from the half guard position to X guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The technique demonstrated involves inserting the butterfly hook and using the hand in the armpit to push the partner away before setting the second hook. The instructor also provides advice on how to handle situations when the opponent postures up.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

5 Tips To Improve Your Half Guard by Bernardo Faria & Tom Deblass

11m · Bernardo Faria

In this video, Bernardo Faria and Tom Deblass provide tips for improving half guard in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. They cover aspects like getting a deep underhook and the usage of leg trapping, emphasizing the importance of being as close to the opponent's leg as possible. They also discuss the use of certain movements and techniques to maintain and improve the half guard position. Furthermore, they draw attention to the common mistakes learners often make and how to avoid them.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

The No Gi Half Guard by Bernardo Faria

$39.50 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features 5x World Champion Bernardo Faria explaining his no-gi half guard techniques. He emphasizes the value of energy efficiency in these techniques. He also highlights how his approach enables practitioners of any age to effectively utilize the half guard to sweep opponents. The techniques presented in the video are designed to defy age and inherently eliminate leg attacks.

Technique: Sweep Techniques Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

What Is Lockdown? 💀

37s · ZombieProofBJJ

In this short video, the instructor from ZombieProofBJJ demonstrates the basic foot positioning for transitioning from a half guard to a lockdown position in Brazilian Jiu-jitsu. The instructor explains that the main concern is to grip the outside of the opponent's heel while rotating the hips. The lockdown technique is successful when the practitioner can manage to control the opponent’s leg and limit their mobility.

Position: Half Guard Category: Positional Control

The main sweep to know from half guard (Lachlan Giles)

6m · Lachlan Giles

The YouTube video by Lachlan Giles explains the Underhook Sweep technique from the Half Guard position. Giles emphasizes the importance of a high underhook and attachment to the opponent's far hip. He further points out common mistakes to avoid and how to effectively transition from underhook to achieving the sweep. Furthermore, Giles demonstrates the roll under sweep as a countermove when the opponent pressures back. The instructional video is very detailed and offers a step-by-step guide on how to successfully execute these sweeps from the Half Guard.

Technique: Underhook Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

The Lockdown Blueprint by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, BJJ legend Tom DeBlass elucidates the methods to master the lockdown half guard. He provides advice on controlling stronger and athletic opponents using the lockdown technique. DeBlass also delves into powerful attacks from the lockdown position such as the electric chair, waiter sweep, heel hook entries, back takes, etc. Furthermore, he guides on how to transition into the lockdown from various positions and escape the lockdown.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Basic Ways to Flatten an Opponent Out by Gordon Ryan

13m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan, known as one of the top submission grapplers in the world, teaches how to effectively flatten an opponent when in the Half Guard position. He gives detailed instruction on controlling the opponent's hips and upper body, using inside bicep ties and crossface methods to maintain positional control. He also gives advice on how to prevent the opponent from making space or gaining an advantageous position by maintaining tight connections and using specific techniques like the backhand frame. Ryan also covers potential reactions from your opponent and how to handle them.

Position: Half Guard Category: Positional Control

Bernardo Faria is an Absolute Beast - BJJ Study

6m · Bernardo Faria

The video focuses on the competition strategies and techniques of Brazilian Jiu Jitsu world champion Bernardo Faria. It highlights his adept skills in using half guard and deep half guard positions as well as his signature pressure passing technique. Bernardo's game plan usually involves pulling guard to half guard and from there attempting to sweep or advance to deep half guard. The video further dissects how Bernardo uses the lapels to break his opponent's posture and secure unbreakable grips. This technique allows him to use his opponent's reactions to his advantage and sweep or transition to a better position. His ability to transition between half guard and deep half guard positions smoothly and leverage them for takedowns was critically analyzed as well.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Octopus Guard Engineering by Adam Wardzinski

$63.50 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video from Adam Wardzinski provides a deep dive into the Octopus Guard, a technique derived from Half Guard. As one of the best active competitors, Adam uses his expertise to simplify and break down this often overlooked technique. The video demonstrates how to transform Half Guard into a powerful and effective system, characterized by unpredictable sweeps, back takes, and submissions. According to Adam, the Octopus Guard's uniqueness lies in its ability to catch opponents off guard, providing an opportunity for advantageous control and attacks.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Gordon Ryan's Easy to Learn Dilemma to Improve Your Jiu Jitsu

4m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan teaches a basic half guard transition strategy, utilizing knee levers and butterfly hooks to create a dilemma for the opponent. Firstly, if the opponent's knee is on the floor, Gordon demonstrates how to use a knee lever to either return to inside position or take over bottom position. Additionally, if the opponent counters the knee lever by removing his knee from the floor, Gordon shows how to quickly switch to butterfly hooks to apply off-balances and attempt various sweeps or submissions. This strategy is designed to help the practitioner regain the inside position and can be used in both upper and lower body battles.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Gordon Ryan Explains Effective Half Guard Passing

8m · Gordon Ryan

In this video, Gordon Ryan instructs on effective half guard passing in no-gi Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Ryan covers a variety of situations and responses, including dealing with different knee shield positions, managing upper body frames, and transitioning to dominant positions such as chest to chest. Ryan emphasizes the value of patience and tactical energy expenditure in creating openings for a successful guard pass. Throughout his instruction, he explains the reasoning behind utilizing certain grips and positions to initiate or defend against various attacks from half guard.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Butterfly Half Guard by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features ADCC Veteran and BJJ Champion, Tom DeBlass, teaching the Half Butterfly Guard technique. DeBlass focuses on the use of the Half Butterfly Guard for effective lower body attacks and its potential to dominate opponents. This guard technique is described as a secret for successful defenses and counterattacks. The video is applicable for all levels, including Gi or No Gi training.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Slow Down Young Athletic Opponents with This Guard Passing Position

6m · Chewjitsu

In this instructional video, Chewjitsu teaches a simple half guard top position that helps to slow down the guard passing process, particularly in No Gi. He reveals ways to stay tighter, add more pressure, and slow down the opponents, thus making it difficult for them. By using the technique of arm scoop, he focuses on getting to a chest-to-chest half guard position to efficiently control the opponent. Chewjitsu explains every step of the process, offering detailed insights into the execution of the move to help viewers understand and practice it accurately.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Passing

The Catch Wrestling Cradle Sequence by Neil Melanson

10m · Neil Melanson

In this video, MMA coach Neil Melanson demonstrates the Catch Wrestling Cradle Sequence. This technique is versatile, as it can be used for submissions, controls, guard passes, and more. Melanson explains how to maintain control over an opponent who is trying to scramble or create space. He also emphasizes that timing is important in executing the cradle sequence effectively. Lastly, he shows several variations of the technique and how to employ it in different scenarios.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Jordan Teaches Bottom Half Guard by Jordan Preisinger

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video by Jordan Preisinger teaches a method for escaping from the bottom of half guard, utilizing the opponent's lapels. The aim is to turn this typically inferior position into a solid foundation from which you can transition to other, more advantageous positions with ease. The escape involves manipulating the lapels to off-balance and flip the opponent over.

Position: Half Guard Category: Escapes

Andre Galvao - Atos jiu jitsu BACK TAKE!!! MUST SEE!!

7m · Andre Galvao

This instructional video features Andre Galvao teaching an effective method to transition from half guard into a back take. He demonstrates the exact steps to take when the opponent attempts to underhook, leveraging it instead to swing and take the back. Emphasizing on driving the weight onto the opponent's arm and the importance of maintaining a grip on the shoulder before attempting the back take. Finally, he also explains how to effectively place hooks to secure the position while rolling, preventing the opponent's escape.

Technique: Back Take Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

The move that built the career of Craig Jones - BJJ Analysis

8m · Not Mapped

This instructional video delves into the strategy that Craig Jones uses, specifically from the half guard position. The video principally focuses on two techniques: the backstep and spin-the-leg. These two techniques were used efficiently by Craig Jones, mainly early in his career, to create dilemmas for his opponents. The instructor highlights the importance of combining these two techniques while entering from the bottom half guard and shows how to effectively deal with a few common counters from opposition.

Position: Half Guard Category: Transitions

Deep Half Guard Domination by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features Tom DeBlass teaching the viewer how to dominate from the Deep Half Guard position using the "Head over Head" sweeping principle. Together with simple hip movements, he instructs on changing grips to easily enter Deep Half Guard even from a dreaded Knee Slice. He also demonstrates how to use the opponent's underhook to setup reversals. DeBlass’ aim is to change the perspective of using Deep Half Guard from a defensive position to an offensive one, setting up sweeps and submissions.

Technique: Concepts / Systems Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

How To Sweep Wrestlers From BJJ Half Guard by Lachlan Giles

10m · Lachlan Giles

In this video, Lachlan Giles shares his approach to sweeping wrestlers from the half guard position. Giles emphasizes the necessity to get an underhook and anchor the opponent to prevent backing away, using the knee shield and elbow to create an effective barrier. He also demonstrates how to leverage a wrestler's pressure to carry out a sweep. The video serves as a useful tool in learning the intricacies of half guard sweeps, specifically against opponents with a wrestling background.

Technique: Wrestling-Based Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

How to Not get Smashed on Half Guard by John Danaher

54s · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher explains a technique to avoid being smashed on the Half Guard. He demonstrates the movements both offensively and defensively, emphasizing the importance of maintaining a strong connection with the opponent's leg and using leverage to increase their weight onto their hands to avoid guard pass. Danaher also discusses potential leg lock entries and sweeps from this position, noting these can be more challenging for older or less athletic practitioners.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Knee Lever John Wayne Sweep Engineering by Adam Wardzinski

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Adam Wardzinski, a top-tier BJJ black belt competitor, teaches the Knee Lever John Wayne Sweep from half guard position as part of his 4-part instructional masterclass. He covers several variations of half guard, including knee shield, lazy butterfly, and half butterfly and demonstrates how to combine the sweep with other techniques such as the Coyote half guard and underhook half guard. The Knee Lever John Wayne Sweep is not only a powerful offensive tool for off-balancing opponents, sweeping and back takes, but also aids in escaping from challenging positions. The tutorial also includes a technique on a shotgun armbar setup that integrates seamlessly with the knee lever system.

Technique: John Wayne Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

Knee Lever / John Wayne half guard sweep #bjj

11s · Steven Kaloustian

The video features instructor Steven Kaloustian demonstrating a Knee Lever or John Wayne sweep from the half guard position. The sweep comes in handy when the practitioner loses the underhook battle in half guard. He explains how to drive into the opponent to prompt them to drive back, then capture their arm and bridge over for the sweep.

Technique: John Wayne Sweep Position: Half Guard Category: Sweeps

The Perfect Way to Connect Octopus Guard with Butterfly Guard with Adam Wardzinski

5m · Adam Wardzinski

In this YouTube video, Adam Wardzinski, a well-known Jiu-Jitsu trainer, explains how to seamlessly connect the octopus guard with the butterfly guard, starting from the half guard position. He begins by illustrating how to get into the octopus guard position and then demonstrates different ways to transition into the butterfly guard. He thoroughly explains each step, highlighting hand placements, foot positions, and body movements. Wardzinski also shows several options for sweeping and taking the back from this position. The video offers a comprehensive instructional guide to learners of all levels.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

The Ground Marshal Half Guard by Neil Melanson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, MMA Coach Neil Melanson teaches his unique take on the Half Guard, termed as the "Ground Marshal Half Guard". His approach enhances efficiency and advances beyond traditional techniques. The course is detailed, aiming to transform viewers' guard game. The techniques taught are reportedly unorthodox yet highly effective, promising definite advantages for practitioners in both gym and tournament settings.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Octopus GUARD system 🐙 | half guard

10m · Tum Energia

In this video, instructor Tum Energia explains the octopus guard from the half guard position. He begins by describing the concept of the octopus guard and how to enter into this position. He emphasizes that this position comes to you; you don't chase it. Instructor Tum mentions that this technique is particularly useful when you are defending the crossface. He shows the right way to block the crossface, how to get the necessary height, and how to maintain control once you're in the octopus guard.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

The Catch Wrestling Leg-Locks by Neil Melanson

7m · Neil Melanson

In this video, coach Neil Melanson provides instructional content on applying Catch Wrestling Leg-Locks from the half guard position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He starts by discussing the importance of controlling your opponent's movement, highlighting the need to block the free leg and protect your own hand. Then, he demonstrates a series of maneuvers resulting in a leg lock, including certain control movements, the use of pressure, and grip techniques. Neil underscores that this is a dynamic, high-pressure exchange demanding finesse and timing.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Half Guard Category: Leg Locks

Half Guard Domination 2.0 by Tom DeBlass

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Tom DeBlass illustrates his Half Guard Domination 2.0 strategy. This involves mastering the half guard game using techniques to create an impassable half guard structure and an intelligent top game. Tom DeBlass addresses common half guard passing attempts like the knee slice and the leg weave, presenting guard recovery options that fortify the half guard approach. Additionally, he explains how to utilize the gi in combination with the half guard to navigate the half guard exchange effectively.

Position: Half Guard Category: Guard Retention

Legendary Lesson: How to do the ARM Drag Takedown!

1m · Matt Arroyo

Matt Arroyo demonstrates an arm drag takedown. He uses this technique especially against bigger, stronger opponents, or those who are better wrestlers because it effectively takes away the sprawl. The technique involves finding the opponent's arm (wrist and elbow area), rotating so the opponent isn't facing you, stepping your foot behind theirs and bringing your knee to the floor while simultaneously dropping forward and moving your arm to the opponent's hip. This movement forces the opponent to fall down.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Jiu Jitsu training for kids

13s · Dominic Barry

In this brief video, instructor Dominic Barry is teaching kids how to execute a standing 'Trip' technique in Jiu Jitsu. As he gives verbal instructions, we can hear him guiding the child to listen for the cue "Trip Nala, trip Nala", on which the child is supposed to perform the move. After successfully completing the technique, Dominic Barry is seen encouraging and praising the child on their performance. This video acts as an instructional guide for teaching simple takedown techniques to children in a friendly and fun way.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Just Stand Up by Craig Jones

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, grappling expert Craig Jones imparts strategies to escape control positions. By learning stand-up techniques, viewers can manage standup fighters and effectively execute fight finishes. The tutorial is part of a 4-part series, where Craig Jones shares insights about misconceptions regarding pinning and control in modern grappling. It features step-by-step stand-up techniques to escape danger, force scrambles, and set up offensive attacks. The video also teaches methods to control standup fighters using techniques such as turks, staples, and half guard pins. Focusing on control and escape, he demonstrates submissions using the arm triangle, north-south choke, and more as potential fight finishes.

Position: Standing Category: Escapes

Ryan Hall Imanari Roll on BJ Penn

57s · Thomas Kincaid MMA

The video features Thomas Kincaid analyzing Ryan Hall's execution of an Imanari Roll on BJ Penn in a fight. Kincaid highlights Hall's set up with an outside leg kick, his drop to the left knee, and reaching inside BJ's leg to roll towards his back. Further, the video explains the mechanics of using roll momentum, gripping positions, and strategic control of the opponent's leg to achieve a successful Imanari Roll.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 BJJ chokes from a standing position

54s · Coach Tim

Coach Tim from Independent MMA in Georgia demonstrates three different standing choke techniques suited for self-defense scenarios where going to the ground may be unfavorable. The first technique discussed is a standing guillotine choke when the opponent comes in close. The second technique is a side choke, which is usable when the opponent tries to grab the shoulder. The final technique is a rear naked choke, performed after a wrist grab and roll out.

Position: Standing Category: Submissions

Standing2Ground: Takedowns & Standing Skills For Jiu Jitsu by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This is an instructional video that is lead by John Danaher, world-renowned BJJ instructor. He demonstrates various takedown techniques with explanations on how to use these methods for different situations during a grappling game. The emphasis is put on the transition from the standing position to the ground through techniques such as snap downs, hand fighting, and lower body offense. He also covers how the principles and concept of grappling takedowns adjust based on different rulesets.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Best Takedowns For Jiu Jitsu (BJJ) by John Danaher

42m · John Danaher

In this video, BJJ coach John Danaher explains and demos several effective takedowns for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He discusses the differences between BJJ and other standing martial arts like judo and wrestling, emphasizing the importance of minimizing back exposure to prevent giving up points in BJJ matches. He also introduces some core selection criteria for BJJ takedowns that guide the techniques presented in his Feet to Floor series. The video provides a comprehensive resource for practitioners looking for effective and safe methods for taking opponents to the ground in a BJJ context.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

MMA Basics to Advanced

27s · Jason Saggo

Instructor Jason Saggo demonstrates a fundamental and an advanced mixed martial arts (MMA) technique in this brief instructional video. The basic technique involves using a jab and a double leg takedown to establish a dominant mount position and then finish the opponent with strikes. For the advanced technique, Saggo introduces the idea of using feints and changing levels, along with multiple strikes to create opportunities for takedowns, finishing with an arm bar submission.

Technique: Armbar Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Feet To Floor: Volume 1 Fundamental Standing Skills by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Professor John Danaher introducing his unique system for mastering standing combat in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ). He proposes new philosophies on pulling guard and using BJJ-oriented strategies to get the fight to the ground, as opposed to relying solely on traditional wrestling or judo techniques. The video also includes methods to counter guard pullers, convert mat moves to standing techniques, and enter attacking positions from the feet. Emphasis is given to transforming a student's fight game within a span of three to six months.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

LEARN HOW to do a real foot sweep! #jflo #ajj #grappling #judo

24s · Keenan Cornelius

This video from Legion AJJ channel, instructed by Keenan Cornelius, explains how to execute a foot sweep from a standing position. He demonstrates the move with a partner, explaining how to step towards your opponent's foot, rotate, and pull if necessary. He emphasizes how getting the opponent light on their leading leg is key for this technique.

Technique: Foot Sweep Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

No-gi Ashi Waza! Practice your foot sweeps #takedown #judo #wrestling

32s · Justin Flores

In this instructional BJJ video, instructor Justin Flores teaches how to use Ashi Waza Foot Sweeps in a no-gi wrestling context. He demonstrates how to transition from a missed takedown into the foot sweeps. He gives an option to run the angle out or to use the foot sweeps if you have more affinity to use your feet. He emphasizes the application of Judo footwork in grappling situations.

Technique: Foot Sweep Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Fastest Way: To Becoming Effective In Standing Position by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video, presented by John Danaher, focuses on improving and revolutionizing the approach to standing position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He instructs on high-percentage takedowns, particularly on using the single leg takedown and its various useful variants. The video also provides instructions on key defensive techniques, such as defending singles, doubles, hand fighting, downblocks, and the use of a whizzer. Lastly, there are offensive sequences provided that allow for tightening the waist or upper body control from failed single attempts.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 NoGi Takedowns You Need to Know | With Olympic Silver Medalist Travis Stevens

9m · Travis Stevens

Three-time US Olympian and Judo Olympic silver medalist, Travis Stevens, breaks down three essential NoGi takedowns in this YouTube video. He starts with demonstrating a collar tied to back take technique, detailing key points on grip control and head position. Next, he moves on to a Russian to ankle pick, again emphasizing on grip, body control, and defense. Finally, he introduces an Arm Drag to Single leg takedown. However, due to video truncation, instructions for the third technique is incomplete. He showcases each technique with careful, slow-motion demonstration, followed by real-time execution, whilst focusing on common troubleshooting areas.

Technique: Back Take Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Nogi Harai Goshi tutorial #takedown #judo #bjj #jiujitsu

14s · Not Mapped

The video shows a tutorial on performing the Harai Goshi takedown in a No-Gi situation. The video does not provide the name of the instructor. In the short clip, the instructor demonstrates the correct footwork and body movements needed for executing the technique, including the key aspect of controlling the opponent's posture. The demonstration does not involve complete throws, focusing on effective gripping and unbalancing the opponent.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Sambo: The Top Game - A Blue Print For "Smeshing" by Khabib Nurmagomedov

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video features undefeated UFC legend Khabib Nurmagomedov showcasing a Sambo-Hybrid system. Khabib covers various techniques such as standing techniques, control and submissions on the ground, and cage control. He provides tips on closing distance with strikes to set up takedowns, shooting, using single legs, and body locks. Additionally, the video includes information about his strategy for holding positions while delivering strikes, and the principles he used for dominant cage control.

Technique: Body Lock Passing Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Judo In Jiu Jitsu Is Taught In Fragments - THIS IS WRONG #danaher #judo #takedown

58s · Justin Flores

In this video, Justin Flores discusses how takedowns are often taught in fragments within Jiu-Jitsu, which he argues is not the most effective approach. He emphasizes the importance of total understanding and execution, rather than simply learning individual techniques. Flores further explores the pitfalls of practicing takedowns with a non-resisting partner and then expecting the same results in a live sparring situation. He also demonstrates correct posture and methods to practice takedowns effectively using the elbow pass and proper positioning.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

HOW TO Do A Front Uchi Mata #judo #nogi #mma #grappling

18s · Justin Flores

In this video, Justin Flores demonstrates the proper technique for performing a front Uchi Mata throw. He emphasizes the correct foot positioning and body movement necessary for a successful throw. He also explains the importance of leaning back and lifting one's opponent to effectively execute the pivot and rotate part of the move.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Standing2Ground: Positional Dominance & Scrimmage Wrestling by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

John Danaher provides a masterclass on Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) takedowns and positional control with a focus on scrimmage wrestling. The video emphasizes that takedowns for submission grappling should be approached differently from other sports like wrestling or judo. Danaher explains and demonstrates highly effective takedowns such as the arm drag, throw by, and duck under to create back exposure and gain dominant back takes from standing position. He also delivers a deep dive into techniques to control neutral position, how to defend against opponent’s attacks, and how to score and control the aftermath of a takedown exchange.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Easy takedown for Jiu Jitsu!

41s · Prism Jiu Jitsu

The video provides an instructional breakdown of an easy and safe takedown technique for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, the snap down. The instructor emphasizes the importance of timing your opponent's step to execute a successful snap down. Using your forearm instead of your hand to bring down the opponent's head as their foot passes the other gives better leverage. The video ends with a demonstration of effectively using this technique to get the opponent’s weight committed to their hands and getting around behind them.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

First 3 Judo Throws to Learn for BJJ #judo #bjj #mma

3m · Shintaro Higashi

In this YouTube video, Shintaro Higashi instructs viewers on the first three Judo throws they should learn for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu: Tomoe Nage, Kouchi Gari, and 1/4 Turn Seionage. Each technique taps into the cross-discipline nature of the throws, changing levels and transitioning from standing to ground. The overview provides concise explanations and practical guidance. The instructional content is aimed at those wishing to broaden their Judo practice with effective techniques that apply to Judo as a whole. An additional bonus technique, Reverse Kata Guruma, is also taught.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Feet To Floor Bundle by John Danaher

$497.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video revolves around a master class by John Danaher, focusing on Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu stand-up techniques. Danaher's "Feet To Floor" Bundle provides key insights into effective takedowns such as Tomoe Nage, Sumi Gaeshi, Osoto Gari, and Kouchi Gari. Through this systematic approach, viewers learn to counter guard pullers, convert ground moves to effective takedowns, and develop a unique BJJ-based strategy for getting the fight to the floor. It emphasizes an innovative way of thinking about BJJ, transitioning from traditional judo or wrestling to a more BJJ-focused stand-up game.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 Judo Throws for BJJ Beginners - #3 Drop Seoi Nage

30s · Shintaro Higashi

Shintaro Higashi, the instructor, provides a tutorial on the Drop Seoi Nage, a judo throw, modified for BJJ context. The technique is considered useful when transitioning from standing to ground and when the opponent's posture is bent. The modification involves doing a quarter turn to make the technique work against upright individuals. Emphasis is placed on maintaining a 90-degree perpendicular angle to the opponent and transition to side control post completion of the throw.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Simple CONCEPT for better TAKEDOWNS 💥 #bjj #jiujitsu

26s · Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu

The video offers instructional content for the takedown technique in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu, demonstrated by the channel host, Jordan Teaches Jiujitsu. Jordan advises the viewers to execute takedowns when the opponent is pushing into them. He explains that it is challenging to perform takedowns when the opponent is backing away, making the technique ineffective. With a demonstration of the application of this concept, the video strives to enhance the learners' efficiency in initiating takedowns.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

New Wave Judo by Satoshi Ishii

$127.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video features Olympic Judo Champion and experienced BJJ black belt, Satoshi Ishii, teaching various standing positions, throws, and trips for No-Gi Grappling. Ishii offers insights on how to better execute throws like uchi mata, sumi gaeshi, tai otoshi, foot sweeps like ouchi gari, kouchi gari, osoto gari, and others, assisting viewers in establishing top positions. These techniques are part of Ishii's personalized method for offensively potent judo, adapted for no-gi grappling.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Jiu Jitsu takedown that works in a street fight!#jiujitsu #jiujitsutips

1m · Robby Donofrio

Robby Donofrio demonstrates a jiu-jitsu takedown technique designed for a street fight scenario. The technique involves defending against a punch with an inside block, gaining an underhook, and using a trip to bring the opponent down. Donofrio highlights the maneuver's usability in real-life self defense circumstances due to its effectiveness and the safe position it leaves the defender in, with ability to control the fight from behind the opponent.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Foot Sweep IS EASY Using This #judo #grappling

15s · Justin Flores

This video tutorial by Justin Flores demonstrates a foot sweep takedown technique designed for modern day grapplers. It promotes practicing the technique repeatedly, aiming for 10 repetitions, for both feet to encourage muscle memory and mastery of this technique. The short clip emphasizes timing and coordination as crucial elements, highlighting the importance of making contact and catching the foot properly to execute the foot sweep successfully.

Technique: Foot Sweep Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Hand Fighting Fundamentals by Steve Mocco

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is led by 2008 Olympian and 2-time NCAA Champion, Steve Mocco, he teaches hand fighting fundamentals while standing. The techniques covered include snapping, underhooking, passing elbows, and more, enabling the viewer to get control while in a standing position. Mocco also teaches how to clear from control ties and front headlocks correctly, turning your opponent's position into your points.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Complete Skills For The Jiu Jitsu Standing Game by John Danaher

35m · John Danaher

In this video, John Danaher gives an overview of the complete skills that a Jiu Jitsu fighter should have when fighting standing. He points out two main weaknesses -leg locks and standing game- historically prevalent in Jiu Jitsu and then focuses on the standing game. He believes having a strong standing game comprises more than learning random takedowns and should be a complete part of the game. The video further breaks down the skills necessary such as gripping strategies, stances, and different forms of takedowns (front and back).

Technique: Back Take Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Takedowns For BJJ Are Easy Once You Understand This

14m · Josh Saunders

In this video, Josh Saunders breaks down the fundamentals of developing effective takedowns for Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes understanding the core principle of the takedown and recommends focusing on getting the opponent's arms out of the way and obtaining body locks or getting to their back. Saunders provides a detailed explanation of using the rear hand to reach, the importance of good head position, and effectively moving and manipulating the opponent. He also covers several techniques including slide bys, throwbyss and duck under.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Buchecha Takedown System In The Gi by Marcus "Buchecha" Almeida

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, the 13-time World Champion, Marcus "Buchecha" Almeida, teaches viewers about his personal takedown system when in Gi. Almeida's system aims to help athletes set the pace early within a match and guide them safely into their preferred passes. He further delves into the concept of reading opponents to decide on the best takedown strategy. Finally, he educates the audience about his preference of wrestling techniques within the framework of Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

6 Wrestling Tips for BJJ Athletes... From A Former D1 Wrestler.

11m · Not Mapped

This instructional video, titled "6 Wrestling Tips for BJJ Athletes... From A Former D1 Wrestler," provides various tips on improving wrestling for BJJ athletes. The instructor, a former D1 Wrestler, covers three main areas of focus: maintaining extension, base, and head position in various wrestling situations. The extension principle explains the importance of either minimizing or maximizing the distance between your opponent's extremities and core body, depending on whether you are in a defensive or offensive position. The base principle emphasizes the alignment between your shoulders and hips for optimal strength and balance. Finally, the head position principle stresses the importance of keeping your head up to ensure proper alignment and power.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Hand fighting is crucial 🤌 #wrestling #bjj #grappling #jiujitsu

14s · Not Mapped

The video emphasizes the importance of hand fighting in wrestling and other grappling sports, including Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The instructor demonstrates how to effectively use hand fighting techniques to control and tire out an opponent in the standing position. The technique involves heavy hands and makes your opponent carry your weight, which is achieved by keeping your legs bent. The video is part of a broader instructional series.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Fundamentals of the Peekaboo & Power Punching by Mike Tyson

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the instructional video, boxer Mike Tyson, along with Triple CCC Henry Cejudo and Master Trainer Rafael Cordeiro, introduces the fundamentals of the Peekaboo stance and Power Punching techniques. Tyson who is known for his speed and power, teaches the lessons he was given by his trainer Cus D’Amato. This video serves to guide viewers step by step through the techniques. The product is endorsed by Rafael Cordeiro, founder of the Chute Boxe Team and Tyson’s recent coach.

Position: Standing Category: Other

STAND UP BASICS FOR WHITE BELTS

10m · Will Brooks

The video, titled "Stand Up Basics for White Belts", is led by experienced instructor Will Brooks. He discusses various stances in the stand-up phase of BJJ, including the wrestler stance, judo stance, straight-up stance, and seated stance. Will Brooks emphasises the importance of maintaining a lower center of gravity and protecting your own body during these stand-up positions. In addition to discussing the techniques, he shares tips for beginners on how to identify and respond effectively to opponents using different stances.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 No Gi Foot Sweeps to Unleash Your Takedown Game

4m · Brian Glick

The video presents Brian Glick teaching three No Gi Foot Sweeps in standup position to improve the viewer's Takedown game. He explains and illustrates each move, showing how they can work in combination, and touching upon the potential reactions and countermoves of the opponent. The focus is on maintaining balance and control while initiating the moves to ensure a successful takedown. The video also emphasizes the usefulness of these techniques in real-life BJJ competitions and sparring sessions.

Technique: Foot Sweep Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Knife Defense For The Street by Burton Richardson

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In the video, Burton Richardson, a well-rounded martial artist with expertise in BJJ, JKD, FMA, Silat, and Krav Maga, demonstrates Knife Defense techniques for street scenarios. Drawing from his diverse martial arts background, he provides practical strategy and techniques for defending against knife attacks. While BJJ techniques aren't explicitly used, Burton's comprehensive approach reflects his deep understanding of real-world self-defense borne out of varied martial arts, making the video valuable for BJJ practitioners targeting practical self-defense skills.

Position: Standing Category: Survival/Defense

Back Bend Takedown by John Danaher

15s · John Danaher

John Danaher in the video executes the 'Back Bend' takedown technique. It commences from a standing position where his opponent locks with him. As his opponent resists, Danaher ensures that the opponent's shoulders are positioned behind his hips and steps forward. He then swiftly executes the 'Back Bend' takedown by simply dropping down.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

How To Do The Perfect Jiu Jitsu Takedowns by John Danaher

27m · John Danaher

John Danaher, the famed BJJ instructor, explains the importance of takedowns in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He particularly focuses on the use of both hands and feet, calling the use of hands "tewaza" or hand takedowns, explaining their utility due to their natural dexterity. The video also introduces "ashiwaza" or foot takedowns, which are broken down into "small foot techniques" and "big foot techniques". The former refers to techniques where one's foot targets the opponent's foot, the latter involves leg-to-leg hooks.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Dismantling Leglocks by Zach Maslany

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, Zach Maslany, a Black Belt under Eddie Bravo, explains defensive strategies for dismantling leg locks. One key tip is to keep your lower body positioned correctly to prevent attacks. The video emphasizes the importance of learning these strategies due to the prevalence of leg locks in modern day jiu-jitsu competitions.

Position: Standing Category: Leg Locks

How to do the most powerful legal judo throw - Travis Stevens Basic Judo Techniques

3m · Travis Stevens

The video is a 3-minute-56 second long tutorial by Travis Stevens about the most powerful legal judo throw known as the O Goshi. Stevens starts by explaining the basics and importance of grip and positioning in executing this throw. He emphasizes on the 'pull' motion, footwork, off-balancing the opponent and the use of shoulders in the rotation to execute this throw. He illustrates the technique using a training partner, repeating each step multiple times for clarity. He makes it clear that the O Goshi is a fundamental technique that can be used across several martial arts disciplines including BJJ and judo.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Danaher - What's wrong with BJJ Takedowns?

19m · John Danaher

In this video, superstar coach John Danaher discusses the issues he sees in the current Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu standing game. He identifies three problems, with the first being a lack of motivation to learn takedowns since they are not deemed necessary for a successful Jiu-Jitsu career. The second issue he notes is a coaching problem where takedowns are taught as an isolated skill rather than an integrated part of the BJJ system, leading to a fragmented understanding of the standing game. Danaher uses his teaching methodology to challenge these issues and improve the understanding and application of takedowns in BJJ.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The footwork Blueprint by Trevor Wittman and Justin Gaethje

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, UFC's renowned trainer Trevor Wittman, with his student Justin Gaethje, teaches the footwork blueprint for striking. The teaching focuses on techniques for moving into and out of danger while setting up shots and generating power. It includes mastering the cross-foot position, the drop step, and slip and roll techniques. The video also offers defensive drills for students aimed at improving their fighting skills.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Easiest Jiu Jitsu No Gi Takedowns by John Danaher

32m · John Danaher

In this instructional video, renowned BJJ instructor John Danaher demonstrates techniques for more manageable No Gi takedowns in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The tutorial mainly focuses on the principle of achieving a dominant position before launching a takedown, thus reducing the difficulty and maximizing efficiency. Danaher highlights how starting from neutral positions is strenuous and less advantageous, and instead advocates the value of achieving a standing rear body lock or having your chest on your opponent's back for an efficient takedown. To assist learners, the video also teaches techniques to maneuver into these dominant positions.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Uchi Mata Counter | Easy Footsweep #judo #jiujitsu #bjj #nogi #nogiboston

14s · Not Mapped

The video provides a Judo/Jiu-Jitsu demonstration on countering the Uchi Mata technique. The instructor starts by trapping the opponent's leg when they step in for the Uchi Mata. From there, the instructor regains balance and takes a hop to force the opponent to also hop. When the opponent's leg becomes light, a foot spin is executed for the counter.

Position: Standing Category: Counters

The No Gi Judo Collection by Matt D'Aquino

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Matt D'Aquino, an Olympian, 4th-degree Judo Black belt, and competitive BJJ brown belt, teaching how to apply Judo to no-gi grappling. He covers a range of throws and takedowns aimed at providing a dominant position, leg grab takedowns that finish in knee ride, and ways to counter a double leg attack. He also discusses how to utilize different stances and deal with opponents who adopt a bent-over position. Matt emphasizes the use of leverage and efficiency, with a strong focus on breaking even the strongest of grips.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Secret Judo Skills For Jujitsu Situations - Travis Stevens Judo Techniques

9m · Travis Stevens

The video, titled "Secret Judo Skills For Jujitsu Situations - Travis Stevens Judo Techniques," features instructor Travis Stevens giving lessons on how to utilize judo throws for Brazilian jiu jitsu (BJJ). Drawing from his expertise as an Olympian in judo and his BJJ black belt, Stevens shares two types of throws best suited to BJJ players: whether they prefer to play from top or bottom positions. The first throw demonstrated is a sequence from a basic Uchi Mata (inner thigh throw) into a foot sweep and ending in an ankle pick; this move is designed for players who favor the top position. The second throw is for those who prefer playing from the bottom but also want to have strong stand-up game. The video is instructional in nature and includes detailed explanations and demonstrations for each technique.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Never Do These 5 Things When Standing for Jiu Jitsu

6m · Not Mapped

This instructional video from "Wrestling University - Takedowns for Jiu Jitsu" highlights five mistakes to avoid during the standing position in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. These include walking towards your opponent with straight arms, leaving a solid position prematurely, avoiding contact, keeping your head below your opponent's shoulder line, and pulling guard in the standing position. The instructor emphasizes the importance of contact and maintaining control, urging learners to observe the situation and consider what's happening rather than fleeing. They discourage grip fighting that doesn't advance your position and advise keeping the head above the opponent's shoulder line to prevent vulnerability to attacks. The video strongly advises against guard pulling while standing.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Drop The World by Ronaldo "Jacare" Souza

$149.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Ronaldo "Jacare" Souza, a renowned figure in the world of combat sports and world champion in various tournaments, guides viewers through the techniques that made him one of the most successful takedown fighters in grappling history. He elucidates on the effectiveness of grip fighting, movement, and throwing and introduces techniques like Morote Seoi Nage, Ogoshi and Kata Garuma. He also provides essential advice on countering the guard pull and introduces his X grip system for maximum grappling success, which can all benefit grapplers at any level.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Why and How to Incorporate Wrestling in your BJJ Training - Coach Zahabi

10m · Firas Zahabi

In this video, Coach Zahabi explains the importance of incorporating wrestling into BJJ practice. He believes that combining elements of wrestling can greatly enhance your self-defense effectiveness and improve your overall physical athleticism. Furthermore, he emphasizes that melding wrestling and BJJ concepts introduces a new dimension to your BJJ game, making training more exciting and enjoyable. The video features a few wrestling techniques along with some ways they can seamlessly blend with BJJ maneuvers for a more integrated grappling approach.

Technique: Wrestling Concepts Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

First 3 Takedowns You Should Know for BJJ (Simplified)

11m · Wrestling University - Takedowns for Ji…

The YouTube video by Wrestling University - Takedowns for Jiu Jitsu establishes the first three takedowns beginners should know, focusing on arm drags and snap downs. The instructor presents these techniques as simplified modifications of established wrestling takedowns to better accommodate their use for Jiu-Jitsu. The techniques are high yield and relatively low risk, making them perfect for beginners. The instructor stresses proper position, grip, and timing for maximum efficacy of these takedowns.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Total Striking Control by Alex "Po Atan" Pereira

$47.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this video, UFC and Glory champion Alex "Po Atan" Pereira instructs viewers on his most trustworthy striking combinations and tactics. He explains how to guide opponents into vulnerable situations and end more fights. Pereira teaches intelligent set-ups, counters, and combos, as well as pad/bag work concepts, to help viewers improve their overall striking ability.

Position: Standing Category: Other

The Hard Truth about Jiu Jitsu Self Defense | ft. Pedro Sauer

21m · Pedro Sauer

Master Pedro Sauer discusses the roots of Gracie Jiu Jitsu and its significance as a system of survival, emphasizing on the self-defense aspect. He details the importance of managing and controlling the distance when engaging with an opponent, especially when striking is likely to occur. Sauer expounds on the strategy of creating a space between oneself and the attacker while showing signs of avoidance until the attacker moves forward which is when he also recommends moving forward. He talks about timing, base, and premeditation of moves before they happen. Sauer also demonstrates postures and weight distributions that can help protect from strikes and increase control over the opponent.

Position: Standing Category: Survival/Defense

Introducing Feet To The Floor: John Danaher's System of Bringing an Opponent To The Grou…

0s · John Danaher

In the video, John Danaher introduces his new system "Feet to Floor." The technique focuses on various standing skills in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) that often get overlooked. Danaher presents various skills, from takedowns where you're in front of your opponent or behind your opponent, pulling guard effectively, preventing someone else pulling guard effectively on you, and pulling opponents into submissions from a standing position. The "Feet to Floor" system aims to cover this wide range of Jiu-Jitsu standing skills, intending to make the standing position more active, creative, and effective.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Fundamentals of Boxing by Teddy Atlas

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Teddy Atlas, a well-respected coach in the boxing field, presents a comprehensive 4-volume series on the fundamentals of boxing for various audience goals ranging from competing, coaching, exercising or simply learning about boxing. He elaborates on key training concepts which include proper pad work, shadow boxing, and heavy bag exercises. He provides viewers with abundant details and insider tips, making the series invaluable for anyone interested in boxing.

Position: Standing Category: Stand‑Up

Stop Getting Taken Down: Gordon Ryan’s Standing Basics Every BJJ Athlete Needs

9m · Gordon Ryan

In this instructional video, Gordon Ryan, a renowned BJJ instructor provides detailed insight into the basic standing position, gripping, and positioning strategies in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu suitable for all skill levels. He emphasizes the importance of dominating the gripping exchanges to ultimately control the match. He also addresses the potential mistake of reaching towards the opponent without being close enough to establish a meaningful connection. Ryan further talks about protecting one's legs and offers advice on how to prevent takedowns by using effective down block hands, sprawls, and counterattacks. Finally, he delves into the idea of using one’s body weight and executing submissions when an opponent has access to one leg.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Top 5 Kata Garuma's For Judo & BJJ! With Olympian Travis Stevens

5m · Travis Stevens

In this YouTube video, Olympian Travis Stevens teaches five different versions of the Kata Garuma, or Fireman's Carry - a judo takedown technique also used in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. Using different grips and movements, he demonstrates how to perform each variation effectively depending on the opponent's position and reaction. Some variants are pre-2012 judo rules but are permitted in BJJ. Stevens emphasises the importance of footwork, grip, and shoulder positioning in effectively executing this powerful takedown.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Nicky Rod's Slay the Hand Fight: Offensive and & Counter Offensive Hand Fighting by Nick…

$194.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This instructional video features Nick Rodriguez explaining and demonstrating offensive and counter-offensive hand fighting from various grappling stances. He shows how to create reactions that can lead to more efficient takedowns using arm passes, drags, snap downs, etc. The video also highlights how to access the opponent's legs, induce them to place their hands on the mat, and control their movement. The video emphasizes the drills recommended by Nicky for rapid skill development.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 Best Lapel Grip Breaks For Judo And Jiu Jitsu With Travis Stevens

6m · Travis Stevens

In this video, Travis Stevens demonstrates his top three lapel grip breaks in Judo and Jiu-Jitsu. The first method involves stepping back and using your hip and back to break your opponent's grip. The second technique, nicknamed "shoulder punch," requires you to use your shoulder to roll forward and push your opponent using their own grip. The third and least favourite technique of Stevens involves twisting the opponent's hand off from underneath their grip. Stevens emphasizes the application of these techniques, especially in right-on-right or same side athlete situations.

Technique: Grip Fighting / Hand Fighting Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

You HAVE to learn the Collar Drag takedown 🥋🔥

1m · Rafael Lovato Jr.

The video features instructor Rafael Lovato Jr. teaching a timeless takedown technique called the collar drag. He explains that the collar drag can be an effective move from white belt to black belt and against various opponent styles. The technique involves getting a cross collar grip and a same side sleeve grip, creating an angle and dragging the opponent's arm while pulling their collar across your body. He emphasizes not to slide and fall to the shoulder, which is a common mistake often leading to being trapped under the opponent. Instead, falling on the elbow gives an atheletic position ready for recovery and takedown.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Jiu-Jitsu Based Self Defense Solutions by Eli Knight

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is an instructional guide by Eli Knight on how to use Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu for self-defense. He demonstrates techniques to protect oneself from an attacker on the street. Knight ensures that the viewer understands the importance of proper form and technique when using BJJ in self-defense scenarios. He emphasises that BJJ is an excellent martial art for personal protection due to its effective and versatile nature.

Position: Standing Category: Survival/Defense

How to Defend Against a Double Leg Takedown #mma #shorts #shortsfeed

16s · Not Mapped

The video focuses on teaching how to defend against a double leg takedown, a common move in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) and Mixed Martial Arts (MMA). It emphasizes the importance of maintaining a proper stance and balance, anticipating the takedown attempt, and initiating a sprawl to maintain balance and create distance. The video further instructs the viewer to establish underhooks and use a whizzer technique to neutralize the takedown. Finally, the video encourages persistent practice to master the technique.

Technique: Double Leg Takedown Position: Standing Category: Survival/Defense

High Percentage Single Leg Entries by Andre Galvao

5m · Andre Galvao

In this video, Andre Galvao, a renowned BJJ competitor, demonstrates high-percentage single leg entries while standing. He explains how to manage distance, control your opponent, and execute proper entry mechanics for successful takedowns. He emphasizes on the importances of pushing the opponent's same-side shoulder to shift their weight, and emphasizes caution against providing the opponents opportunities for counters. Galvao also underscores the significance of stiffening the arm during the push to make the opponent's leg lighter for an effortless grab.

Technique: Single Leg Takedown Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Feet To Floor Volume 2 by John Danaher

$197.00 • BJJ Fanatics

This video is part of John Danaher's 'Feet To Floor Volume 2' course teaching effective BJJ throws. It covers techniques like Tomoe Nage, Sumi Gaeshi, Osoto Gari, Kouchi Gari and focuses on technical, strategic ways to get opponents down for submission grappling and Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu. The series includes detailed instruction for setting up grips, kuzushi (balance breaking), and execution of the throws and foot sweeps. Professor Danaher is recognized as a top grappling coach with championship students like Gordon Ryan, Georges St. Pierre, and Garry Tonon.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

3 No-Gi Takedowns for Beginner BJJ

6m · Jason Sago

The video features Jason Sago, a third-degree black belt in Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu and a former UFC fighter, demonstrating three no-gi takedowns suitable for beginners. The techniques covered are the chest pressure takedown, the snap down, and the hip throw. For each, Sago provides an in-depth discussion, detailing the grips, body positioning and movement involved, along with potential follow-ups after successful execution. For instance, after completing the hip throw, he shows one way to transition into an arm bar submission. It's an instructional video aimed at teaching fundamental no-gi takedown techniques to newcomers of BJJ.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Easy & Effective Takedowns To Help You Win More BJJ Matches

11m · Josh Saunders

In this video, Instructor Josh Saunders introduces and teaches effective wrestling-based takedowns specifically coded for Jiu-Jitsu. He emphasizes the importance of stance, where one should not go too low or too high, and the need to protect the lead leg with the lead hand. He demonstrates the push-pull method, highlighting the need to extend the arms fully during a snap-down and creating opportunities to move in for a takedown. He also teaches a variation for opponents with upright postures, where the practitioner can use Towes or calf sweeps to disbalance the opponent, creating an opening for the snap-down.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Muay Thai Fundamentals by Rafael Cordeiro

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

Rafael Cordeiro, a well-known martial arts coach responsible for training renowned fighters offers lessons on the fundamentals of muay thai. He guides through the process of foot movement, throwing and defending basic strikes, as well as how to attack and defend in combination. These teachings stem from the principles he uses to train his professional fighters at powerhouse gyms like Kings MMA and Chute Boxe.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Ouchi Gari (Great Inner Reap) with Judo Black Belt Matt D'Aquino

4m · Matt D'Aquino

In this instructional video, Matt D'Aquino, a Judo Olympian, demonstrates and explains the technique for executing Ouchi Gari, or a major inner reaping throw. He highlights two ways of entering - a one-step entry and a three-step entry, emphasizing the importance of footwork. He also provides detailed instruction on body position, pulling the opponent, bending the knees, positioning the head, and hip alignment. D'Aquino gives tips for effective execution and common mistakes to avoid when performing this throw.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

VERY SIMPLE - Ankle Pick Takedown 🤼‍♂️ #bjj #grappling #martialarts

22s · Yoshi Jiu-Jitsu Tech

The video is a brief instructional by Yoshi Jiu-Jitsu Tech on executing an Ankle Pick Takedown. The instructor emphasizes the importance of proper timing and deceiving the opponent by shifting your body weight. The technique involves pulling your opponent to get them on their toes or step forward before swiftly transitioning to the knees to grasp the opponent's ankle.

Technique: Takedowns / Throws Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Destroying Opponents With Strikes From Every Range by Bas Rutten

$97.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video tutorial by Bas Rutten revolves around mastering the open stance he discovered and perfected by observing champion fighters in assorted combat sports. Bas teaches how to increase the power in punches by utilizing specific angles and patterns that he developed during his career. The drill also involves learning Bas' signature liver kicks and palm strikes to keep opponents guessing. The video is meant to offer more effective training and to shorten the learning curve with all of Bas' favourite drills.

Position: Standing Category: Other

TRAVIS STEVENS KATA GURUMA VARIATION

34s · Travis Stevens

In this video, Travis Stevens demonstrates a variation of the Kata Guruma (fireman's carry) takedown suited for dealing with opponents who have a different dominant hand (opposite sided opponents). The technique involves obtaining sleeve control, snapping down the opponent by chopping their front leg, and then employing the necessary footwork to complete the throw. The video emphasizes the importance of lifting the hips off the floor to effectively execute the technique.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Throws: Harai Goshi (Sweeping Hip Throw) with Matt D'Aquino

3m · Matt D'Aquino

Matt D'Aquino, a 3rd degree black belt in Judo and a 2008 Beijing Olympian, demonstrates the Harai Goshi Judo technique. Matt emphasizes gripping the opponent's elbow and the back of the opponent's head before pulling them downwards, then using the opponent's natural reaction to lift up in order to execute the throw. The technique results in a side control position if executed correctly. The strategy is particularly effective when the opponent is bent over.

Technique: Hip Throw Sweep Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

The Top Game Toolkit by Owen Livesey

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

The video is an instructional guide by Owen Livesey where he presents a variety of techniques starting from a standing position. The lessons include hand-fighting for gaining instant advantage, implementing a series of takedowns including snap down, fireman's carry, and Sumi Gaeshi. Additionally, Livesey also teaches techniques to pass a seated guard using Toreando pass and grips, passing open guard, and how to employ triangle and Kimura counters. The aim of the series is to swiftly pass the guard, take the back, and apply successful submissions.

Technique: Kimura Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up

Fun Way To Learn The Darce Choke - The Bar Darce - by Jeff Glover

4m · Jeff Glover

In this video, BJJ black belt instructor Jeff Glover shares a fun and effective way to learn and apply the 'Darce Choke' technique. He named it the "Bar Darce," explaining the setup as individuals side by side in a standing position, similar to sitting at a bar. He details the grip, the arm positioning, and the triggers for initiating the choke. Glover also differentiates between a Darce choke and an Anaconda choke, attributing the differentiating factor to which arm of the opponent is used to initiate the choke.

Technique: Darce Choke Position: Standing Category: Submissions

MONEY VELA to FOOT SWEEP by Ruotolo Brothers

19s · Ruotolo Brothers

The video features the Ruotolo Brothers demonstrating a foot sweep technique from a stand-up position. They explain the technique as a follow up for when a previous submission attempt has failed, and the opponent is standing up. They emphasize the timing to effectively catch the opponent off balance as they're coming up. This tactic can be a game-changer, enabling the practitioner to take control of the match effectively.

Technique: Foot Sweep Position: Standing Category: Sweeps

Basics To Advanced: Ankle Picks For Jiu Jitsu by Aaron Benzrihem

$79.00 • BJJ Fanatics

In this instructional video, black belt Aaron Benzrihem guides the viewer through the step-by-step method of utilizing the ankle pick in Brazilian Jiu Jitsu. He demonstrates various setups and finishing variations for the ankle pick, which can be initiated from different scenarios: standing, three-point stance, or seated position. With an emphasis on maintaining the top position and minimizing risk, Benzrihem's expert instruction covers defensive combinations that keep an opponent on the defensive while effectively avoiding troublesome submissions.

Position: Standing Category: Takedowns/Stand‑Up